1 | =head1 NAME
|
---|
2 |
|
---|
3 | Config - access Perl configuration information
|
---|
4 |
|
---|
5 | =head1 SYNOPSIS
|
---|
6 |
|
---|
7 | use Config;
|
---|
8 | if ($Config{usethreads}) {
|
---|
9 | print "has thread support\n"
|
---|
10 | }
|
---|
11 |
|
---|
12 | use Config qw(myconfig config_sh config_vars config_re);
|
---|
13 |
|
---|
14 | print myconfig();
|
---|
15 |
|
---|
16 | print config_sh();
|
---|
17 |
|
---|
18 | print config_re();
|
---|
19 |
|
---|
20 | config_vars(qw(osname archname));
|
---|
21 |
|
---|
22 |
|
---|
23 | =head1 DESCRIPTION
|
---|
24 |
|
---|
25 | The Config module contains all the information that was available to
|
---|
26 | the C<Configure> program at Perl build time (over 900 values).
|
---|
27 |
|
---|
28 | Shell variables from the F<config.sh> file (written by Configure) are
|
---|
29 | stored in the readonly-variable C<%Config>, indexed by their names.
|
---|
30 |
|
---|
31 | Values stored in config.sh as 'undef' are returned as undefined
|
---|
32 | values. The perl C<exists> function can be used to check if a
|
---|
33 | named variable exists.
|
---|
34 |
|
---|
35 | =over 4
|
---|
36 |
|
---|
37 | =item myconfig()
|
---|
38 |
|
---|
39 | Returns a textual summary of the major perl configuration values.
|
---|
40 | See also C<-V> in L<perlrun/Switches>.
|
---|
41 |
|
---|
42 | =item config_sh()
|
---|
43 |
|
---|
44 | Returns the entire perl configuration information in the form of the
|
---|
45 | original config.sh shell variable assignment script.
|
---|
46 |
|
---|
47 | =item config_re($regex)
|
---|
48 |
|
---|
49 | Like config_sh() but returns, as a list, only the config entries who's
|
---|
50 | names match the $regex.
|
---|
51 |
|
---|
52 | =item config_vars(@names)
|
---|
53 |
|
---|
54 | Prints to STDOUT the values of the named configuration variable. Each is
|
---|
55 | printed on a separate line in the form:
|
---|
56 |
|
---|
57 | name='value';
|
---|
58 |
|
---|
59 | Names which are unknown are output as C<name='UNKNOWN';>.
|
---|
60 | See also C<-V:name> in L<perlrun/Switches>.
|
---|
61 |
|
---|
62 | =back
|
---|
63 |
|
---|
64 | =head1 EXAMPLE
|
---|
65 |
|
---|
66 | Here's a more sophisticated example of using %Config:
|
---|
67 |
|
---|
68 | use Config;
|
---|
69 | use strict;
|
---|
70 |
|
---|
71 | my %sig_num;
|
---|
72 | my @sig_name;
|
---|
73 | unless($Config{sig_name} && $Config{sig_num}) {
|
---|
74 | die "No sigs?";
|
---|
75 | } else {
|
---|
76 | my @names = split ' ', $Config{sig_name};
|
---|
77 | @sig_num{@names} = split ' ', $Config{sig_num};
|
---|
78 | foreach (@names) {
|
---|
79 | $sig_name[$sig_num{$_}] ||= $_;
|
---|
80 | }
|
---|
81 | }
|
---|
82 |
|
---|
83 | print "signal #17 = $sig_name[17]\n";
|
---|
84 | if ($sig_num{ALRM}) {
|
---|
85 | print "SIGALRM is $sig_num{ALRM}\n";
|
---|
86 | }
|
---|
87 |
|
---|
88 | =head1 WARNING
|
---|
89 |
|
---|
90 | Because this information is not stored within the perl executable
|
---|
91 | itself it is possible (but unlikely) that the information does not
|
---|
92 | relate to the actual perl binary which is being used to access it.
|
---|
93 |
|
---|
94 | The Config module is installed into the architecture and version
|
---|
95 | specific library directory ($Config{installarchlib}) and it checks the
|
---|
96 | perl version number when loaded.
|
---|
97 |
|
---|
98 | The values stored in config.sh may be either single-quoted or
|
---|
99 | double-quoted. Double-quoted strings are handy for those cases where you
|
---|
100 | need to include escape sequences in the strings. To avoid runtime variable
|
---|
101 | interpolation, any C<$> and C<@> characters are replaced by C<\$> and
|
---|
102 | C<\@>, respectively. This isn't foolproof, of course, so don't embed C<\$>
|
---|
103 | or C<\@> in double-quoted strings unless you're willing to deal with the
|
---|
104 | consequences. (The slashes will end up escaped and the C<$> or C<@> will
|
---|
105 | trigger variable interpolation)
|
---|
106 |
|
---|
107 | =head1 GLOSSARY
|
---|
108 |
|
---|
109 | Most C<Config> variables are determined by the C<Configure> script
|
---|
110 | on platforms supported by it (which is most UNIX platforms). Some
|
---|
111 | platforms have custom-made C<Config> variables, and may thus not have
|
---|
112 | some of the variables described below, or may have extraneous variables
|
---|
113 | specific to that particular port. See the port specific documentation
|
---|
114 | in such cases.
|
---|
115 |
|
---|
116 | =head2 _
|
---|
117 |
|
---|
118 | =over 4
|
---|
119 |
|
---|
120 | =item C<_a>
|
---|
121 |
|
---|
122 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
123 |
|
---|
124 | This variable defines the extension used for ordinary library files.
|
---|
125 | For unix, it is F<.a>. The F<.> is included. Other possible
|
---|
126 | values include F<.lib>.
|
---|
127 |
|
---|
128 | =item C<_exe>
|
---|
129 |
|
---|
130 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
131 |
|
---|
132 | This variable defines the extension used for executable files.
|
---|
133 | C<DJGPP>, Cygwin and F<OS/2> use F<.exe>. Stratus C<VOS> uses F<.pm>.
|
---|
134 | On operating systems which do not require a specific extension
|
---|
135 | for executable files, this variable is empty.
|
---|
136 |
|
---|
137 | =item C<_o>
|
---|
138 |
|
---|
139 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
140 |
|
---|
141 | This variable defines the extension used for object files.
|
---|
142 | For unix, it is F<.o>. The F<.> is included. Other possible
|
---|
143 | values include F<.obj>.
|
---|
144 |
|
---|
145 | =back
|
---|
146 |
|
---|
147 | =head2 a
|
---|
148 |
|
---|
149 | =over 4
|
---|
150 |
|
---|
151 | =item C<afs>
|
---|
152 |
|
---|
153 | From F<afs.U>:
|
---|
154 |
|
---|
155 | This variable is set to C<true> if C<AFS> (Andrew File System) is used
|
---|
156 | on the system, C<false> otherwise. It is possible to override this
|
---|
157 | with a hint value or command line option, but you'd better know
|
---|
158 | what you are doing.
|
---|
159 |
|
---|
160 | =item C<afsroot>
|
---|
161 |
|
---|
162 | From F<afs.U>:
|
---|
163 |
|
---|
164 | This variable is by default set to F</afs>. In the unlikely case
|
---|
165 | this is not the correct root, it is possible to override this with
|
---|
166 | a hint value or command line option. This will be used in subsequent
|
---|
167 | tests for AFSness in the Perl configure and test process.
|
---|
168 |
|
---|
169 | =item C<alignbytes>
|
---|
170 |
|
---|
171 | From F<alignbytes.U>:
|
---|
172 |
|
---|
173 | This variable holds the number of bytes required to align a
|
---|
174 | double-- or a long double when applicable. Usual values are
|
---|
175 | 2, 4 and 8. The default is eight, for safety.
|
---|
176 |
|
---|
177 | =item C<ansi2knr>
|
---|
178 |
|
---|
179 | From F<ansi2knr.U>:
|
---|
180 |
|
---|
181 | This variable is set if the user needs to run ansi2knr.
|
---|
182 | Currently, this is not supported, so we just abort.
|
---|
183 |
|
---|
184 | =item C<aphostname>
|
---|
185 |
|
---|
186 | From F<d_gethname.U>:
|
---|
187 |
|
---|
188 | This variable contains the command which can be used to compute the
|
---|
189 | host name. The command is fully qualified by its absolute path, to make
|
---|
190 | it safe when used by a process with super-user privileges.
|
---|
191 |
|
---|
192 | =item C<api_revision>
|
---|
193 |
|
---|
194 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
195 |
|
---|
196 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and
|
---|
197 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary
|
---|
198 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string
|
---|
199 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_revision is the C<5>.
|
---|
200 | Prior to 5.5.640, the format was a floating point number,
|
---|
201 | like 5.00563.
|
---|
202 |
|
---|
203 | F<perl.c>:incpush() and F<lib/lib.pm> will automatically search in
|
---|
204 | F<$sitelib/.>. for older directories back to the limit specified
|
---|
205 | by these api_ variables. This is only useful if you have a
|
---|
206 | perl library directory tree structured like the default one.
|
---|
207 | See C<INSTALL> for how this works. The versioned site_perl
|
---|
208 | directory was introduced in 5.005, so that is the lowest
|
---|
209 | possible value. The version list appropriate for the current
|
---|
210 | system is determined in F<inc_version_list.U>.
|
---|
211 |
|
---|
212 | C<XXX> To do: Since compatibility can depend on compile time
|
---|
213 | options (such as bincompat, longlong, etc.) it should
|
---|
214 | (perhaps) be set by Configure, but currently it isn't.
|
---|
215 | Currently, we read a hard-wired value from F<patchlevel.h>.
|
---|
216 | Perhaps what we ought to do is take the hard-wired value from
|
---|
217 | F<patchlevel.h> but then modify it if the current Configure
|
---|
218 | options warrant. F<patchlevel.h> then would use an #ifdef guard.
|
---|
219 |
|
---|
220 | =item C<api_subversion>
|
---|
221 |
|
---|
222 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
223 |
|
---|
224 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and
|
---|
225 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary
|
---|
226 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string
|
---|
227 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_subversion is the C<1>. See api_revision for
|
---|
228 | full details.
|
---|
229 |
|
---|
230 | =item C<api_version>
|
---|
231 |
|
---|
232 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
233 |
|
---|
234 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and
|
---|
235 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary
|
---|
236 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string
|
---|
237 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_version is the C<6>. See api_revision for
|
---|
238 | full details. As a special case, 5.5.0 is rendered in the
|
---|
239 | old-style as 5.005. (In the 5.005_0x maintenance series,
|
---|
240 | this was the only versioned directory in $sitelib.)
|
---|
241 |
|
---|
242 | =item C<api_versionstring>
|
---|
243 |
|
---|
244 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
245 |
|
---|
246 | This variable combines api_revision, api_version, and
|
---|
247 | api_subversion in a format such as 5.6.1 (or 5_6_1) suitable
|
---|
248 | for use as a directory name. This is filesystem dependent.
|
---|
249 |
|
---|
250 | =item C<ar>
|
---|
251 |
|
---|
252 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
253 |
|
---|
254 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
255 | full pathname (if any) of the ar program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
256 | the value is reset to a plain C<ar> and is not useful.
|
---|
257 |
|
---|
258 | =item C<archlib>
|
---|
259 |
|
---|
260 | From F<archlib.U>:
|
---|
261 |
|
---|
262 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants
|
---|
263 | to put architecture-dependent public library files for $package.
|
---|
264 | It is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/lib>.
|
---|
265 | Programs using this variable must be prepared to deal
|
---|
266 | with filename expansion.
|
---|
267 |
|
---|
268 | =item C<archlibexp>
|
---|
269 |
|
---|
270 | From F<archlib.U>:
|
---|
271 |
|
---|
272 | This variable is the same as the archlib variable, but is
|
---|
273 | filename expanded at configuration time, for convenient use.
|
---|
274 |
|
---|
275 | =item C<archname64>
|
---|
276 |
|
---|
277 | From F<use64bits.U>:
|
---|
278 |
|
---|
279 | This variable is used for the 64-bitness part of $archname.
|
---|
280 |
|
---|
281 | =item C<archname>
|
---|
282 |
|
---|
283 | From F<archname.U>:
|
---|
284 |
|
---|
285 | This variable is a short name to characterize the current
|
---|
286 | architecture. It is used mainly to construct the default archlib.
|
---|
287 |
|
---|
288 | =item C<archobjs>
|
---|
289 |
|
---|
290 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
291 |
|
---|
292 | This variable defines any additional objects that must be linked
|
---|
293 | in with the program on this architecture. On unix, it is usually
|
---|
294 | empty. It is typically used to include emulations of unix calls
|
---|
295 | or other facilities. For perl on F<OS/2>, for example, this would
|
---|
296 | include F<os2/os2.obj>.
|
---|
297 |
|
---|
298 | =item C<asctime_r_proto>
|
---|
299 |
|
---|
300 | From F<d_asctime_r.U>:
|
---|
301 |
|
---|
302 | This variable encodes the prototype of asctime_r.
|
---|
303 | It is zero if d_asctime_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
304 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_asctime_r
|
---|
305 | is defined.
|
---|
306 |
|
---|
307 | =item C<awk>
|
---|
308 |
|
---|
309 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
310 |
|
---|
311 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
312 | full pathname (if any) of the awk program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
313 | the value is reset to a plain C<awk> and is not useful.
|
---|
314 |
|
---|
315 | =back
|
---|
316 |
|
---|
317 | =head2 b
|
---|
318 |
|
---|
319 | =over 4
|
---|
320 |
|
---|
321 | =item C<baserev>
|
---|
322 |
|
---|
323 | From F<baserev.U>:
|
---|
324 |
|
---|
325 | The base revision level of this package, from the F<.package> file.
|
---|
326 |
|
---|
327 | =item C<bash>
|
---|
328 |
|
---|
329 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
330 |
|
---|
331 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
332 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
333 |
|
---|
334 | =item C<bin>
|
---|
335 |
|
---|
336 | From F<bin.U>:
|
---|
337 |
|
---|
338 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants
|
---|
339 | to put publicly executable images for the package in question. It
|
---|
340 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using
|
---|
341 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution.
|
---|
342 |
|
---|
343 | =item C<binexp>
|
---|
344 |
|
---|
345 | From F<bin.U>:
|
---|
346 |
|
---|
347 | This is the same as the bin variable, but is filename expanded at
|
---|
348 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles.
|
---|
349 |
|
---|
350 | =item C<bison>
|
---|
351 |
|
---|
352 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
353 |
|
---|
354 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
355 | full pathname (if any) of the bison program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
356 | the value is reset to a plain C<bison> and is not useful.
|
---|
357 |
|
---|
358 | =item C<byacc>
|
---|
359 |
|
---|
360 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
361 |
|
---|
362 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
363 | full pathname (if any) of the byacc program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
364 | the value is reset to a plain C<byacc> and is not useful.
|
---|
365 |
|
---|
366 | =item C<byteorder>
|
---|
367 |
|
---|
368 | From F<byteorder.U>:
|
---|
369 |
|
---|
370 | This variable holds the byte order in a C<UV>. In the following,
|
---|
371 | larger digits indicate more significance. The variable byteorder
|
---|
372 | is either 4321 on a big-endian machine, or 1234 on a little-endian,
|
---|
373 | or 87654321 on a Cray ... or 3412 with weird order !
|
---|
374 |
|
---|
375 | =back
|
---|
376 |
|
---|
377 | =head2 c
|
---|
378 |
|
---|
379 | =over 4
|
---|
380 |
|
---|
381 | =item C<c>
|
---|
382 |
|
---|
383 | From F<n.U>:
|
---|
384 |
|
---|
385 | This variable contains the \c string if that is what causes the echo
|
---|
386 | command to suppress newline. Otherwise it is null. Correct usage is
|
---|
387 | $echo $n "prompt for a question: $c".
|
---|
388 |
|
---|
389 | =item C<castflags>
|
---|
390 |
|
---|
391 | From F<d_castneg.U>:
|
---|
392 |
|
---|
393 | This variable contains a flag that precise difficulties the
|
---|
394 | compiler has casting odd floating values to unsigned long:
|
---|
395 | 0 = ok
|
---|
396 | 1 = couldn't cast < 0
|
---|
397 | 2 = couldn't cast >= 0x80000000
|
---|
398 | 4 = couldn't cast in argument expression list
|
---|
399 |
|
---|
400 | =item C<cat>
|
---|
401 |
|
---|
402 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
403 |
|
---|
404 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
405 | full pathname (if any) of the cat program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
406 | the value is reset to a plain C<cat> and is not useful.
|
---|
407 |
|
---|
408 | =item C<cc>
|
---|
409 |
|
---|
410 | From F<cc.U>:
|
---|
411 |
|
---|
412 | This variable holds the name of a command to execute a C compiler which
|
---|
413 | can resolve multiple global references that happen to have the same
|
---|
414 | name. Usual values are C<cc> and C<gcc>.
|
---|
415 | Fervent C<ANSI> compilers may be called C<c89>. C<AIX> has xlc.
|
---|
416 |
|
---|
417 | =item C<cccdlflags>
|
---|
418 |
|
---|
419 | From F<dlsrc.U>:
|
---|
420 |
|
---|
421 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be
|
---|
422 | passed with C<cc -c> to compile modules to be used to create a shared
|
---|
423 | library that will be used for dynamic loading. For hpux, this
|
---|
424 | should be +z. It is up to the makefile to use it.
|
---|
425 |
|
---|
426 | =item C<ccdlflags>
|
---|
427 |
|
---|
428 | From F<dlsrc.U>:
|
---|
429 |
|
---|
430 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be
|
---|
431 | passed to cc to link with a shared library for dynamic loading.
|
---|
432 | It is up to the makefile to use it. For sunos 4.1, it should
|
---|
433 | be empty.
|
---|
434 |
|
---|
435 | =item C<ccflags>
|
---|
436 |
|
---|
437 | From F<ccflags.U>:
|
---|
438 |
|
---|
439 | This variable contains any additional C compiler flags desired by
|
---|
440 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this.
|
---|
441 |
|
---|
442 | =item C<ccflags_uselargefiles>
|
---|
443 |
|
---|
444 | From F<uselfs.U>:
|
---|
445 |
|
---|
446 | This variable contains the compiler flags needed by large file builds
|
---|
447 | and added to ccflags by hints files.
|
---|
448 |
|
---|
449 | =item C<ccname>
|
---|
450 |
|
---|
451 | From F<Checkcc.U>:
|
---|
452 |
|
---|
453 | This can set either by hints files or by Configure. If using
|
---|
454 | gcc, this is gcc, and if not, usually equal to cc, unimpressive, no?
|
---|
455 | Some platforms, however, make good use of this by storing the
|
---|
456 | flavor of the C compiler being used here. For example if using
|
---|
457 | the Sun WorkShop suite, ccname will be C<workshop>.
|
---|
458 |
|
---|
459 | =item C<ccsymbols>
|
---|
460 |
|
---|
461 | From F<Cppsym.U>:
|
---|
462 |
|
---|
463 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C compiler alone.
|
---|
464 | The symbols defined by cpp or by cc when it calls cpp are not in
|
---|
465 | this list, see cppsymbols and cppccsymbols.
|
---|
466 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens.
|
---|
467 |
|
---|
468 | =item C<ccversion>
|
---|
469 |
|
---|
470 | From F<Checkcc.U>:
|
---|
471 |
|
---|
472 | This can set either by hints files or by Configure. If using
|
---|
473 | a (non-gcc) vendor cc, this variable may contain a version for
|
---|
474 | the compiler.
|
---|
475 |
|
---|
476 | =item C<cf_by>
|
---|
477 |
|
---|
478 | From F<cf_who.U>:
|
---|
479 |
|
---|
480 | Login name of the person who ran the Configure script and answered the
|
---|
481 | questions. This is used to tag both F<config.sh> and F<config_h.SH>.
|
---|
482 |
|
---|
483 | =item C<cf_email>
|
---|
484 |
|
---|
485 | From F<cf_email.U>:
|
---|
486 |
|
---|
487 | Electronic mail address of the person who ran Configure. This can be
|
---|
488 | used by units that require the user's e-mail, like F<MailList.U>.
|
---|
489 |
|
---|
490 | =item C<cf_time>
|
---|
491 |
|
---|
492 | From F<cf_who.U>:
|
---|
493 |
|
---|
494 | Holds the output of the C<date> command when the configuration file was
|
---|
495 | produced. This is used to tag both F<config.sh> and F<config_h.SH>.
|
---|
496 |
|
---|
497 | =item C<charsize>
|
---|
498 |
|
---|
499 | From F<charsize.U>:
|
---|
500 |
|
---|
501 | This variable contains the value of the C<CHARSIZE> symbol, which
|
---|
502 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a character.
|
---|
503 |
|
---|
504 | =item C<chgrp>
|
---|
505 |
|
---|
506 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
507 |
|
---|
508 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
509 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
510 |
|
---|
511 | =item C<chmod>
|
---|
512 |
|
---|
513 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
514 |
|
---|
515 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
516 | full pathname (if any) of the chmod program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
517 | the value is reset to a plain C<chmod> and is not useful.
|
---|
518 |
|
---|
519 | =item C<chown>
|
---|
520 |
|
---|
521 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
522 |
|
---|
523 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
524 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
525 |
|
---|
526 | =item C<clocktype>
|
---|
527 |
|
---|
528 | From F<d_times.U>:
|
---|
529 |
|
---|
530 | This variable holds the type returned by times(). It can be long,
|
---|
531 | or clock_t on C<BSD> sites (in which case <sys/types.h> should be
|
---|
532 | included).
|
---|
533 |
|
---|
534 | =item C<comm>
|
---|
535 |
|
---|
536 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
537 |
|
---|
538 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
539 | full pathname (if any) of the comm program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
540 | the value is reset to a plain C<comm> and is not useful.
|
---|
541 |
|
---|
542 | =item C<compress>
|
---|
543 |
|
---|
544 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
545 |
|
---|
546 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
547 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
548 |
|
---|
549 | =item C<contains>
|
---|
550 |
|
---|
551 | From F<contains.U>:
|
---|
552 |
|
---|
553 | This variable holds the command to do a grep with a proper return
|
---|
554 | status. On most sane systems it is simply C<grep>. On insane systems
|
---|
555 | it is a grep followed by a cat followed by a test. This variable
|
---|
556 | is primarily for the use of other Configure units.
|
---|
557 |
|
---|
558 | =item C<cp>
|
---|
559 |
|
---|
560 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
561 |
|
---|
562 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
563 | full pathname (if any) of the cp program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
564 | the value is reset to a plain C<cp> and is not useful.
|
---|
565 |
|
---|
566 | =item C<cpio>
|
---|
567 |
|
---|
568 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
569 |
|
---|
570 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
571 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
572 |
|
---|
573 | =item C<cpp>
|
---|
574 |
|
---|
575 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
576 |
|
---|
577 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
578 | full pathname (if any) of the cpp program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
579 | the value is reset to a plain C<cpp> and is not useful.
|
---|
580 |
|
---|
581 | =item C<cpp_stuff>
|
---|
582 |
|
---|
583 | From F<cpp_stuff.U>:
|
---|
584 |
|
---|
585 | This variable contains an identification of the concatenation mechanism
|
---|
586 | used by the C preprocessor.
|
---|
587 |
|
---|
588 | =item C<cppccsymbols>
|
---|
589 |
|
---|
590 | From F<Cppsym.U>:
|
---|
591 |
|
---|
592 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C compiler
|
---|
593 | when it calls cpp. The symbols defined by the cc alone or cpp
|
---|
594 | alone are not in this list, see ccsymbols and cppsymbols.
|
---|
595 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens.
|
---|
596 |
|
---|
597 | =item C<cppflags>
|
---|
598 |
|
---|
599 | From F<ccflags.U>:
|
---|
600 |
|
---|
601 | This variable holds the flags that will be passed to the C pre-
|
---|
602 | processor. It is up to the Makefile to use it.
|
---|
603 |
|
---|
604 | =item C<cpplast>
|
---|
605 |
|
---|
606 | From F<cppstdin.U>:
|
---|
607 |
|
---|
608 | This variable has the same functionality as cppminus, only it applies
|
---|
609 | to cpprun and not cppstdin.
|
---|
610 |
|
---|
611 | =item C<cppminus>
|
---|
612 |
|
---|
613 | From F<cppstdin.U>:
|
---|
614 |
|
---|
615 | This variable contains the second part of the string which will invoke
|
---|
616 | the C preprocessor on the standard input and produce to standard
|
---|
617 | output. This variable will have the value C<-> if cppstdin needs
|
---|
618 | a minus to specify standard input, otherwise the value is "".
|
---|
619 |
|
---|
620 | =item C<cpprun>
|
---|
621 |
|
---|
622 | From F<cppstdin.U>:
|
---|
623 |
|
---|
624 | This variable contains the command which will invoke a C preprocessor
|
---|
625 | on standard input and put the output to stdout. It is guaranteed not
|
---|
626 | to be a wrapper and may be a null string if no preprocessor can be
|
---|
627 | made directly available. This preprocessor might be different from the
|
---|
628 | one used by the C compiler. Don't forget to append cpplast after the
|
---|
629 | preprocessor options.
|
---|
630 |
|
---|
631 | =item C<cppstdin>
|
---|
632 |
|
---|
633 | From F<cppstdin.U>:
|
---|
634 |
|
---|
635 | This variable contains the command which will invoke the C
|
---|
636 | preprocessor on standard input and put the output to stdout.
|
---|
637 | It is primarily used by other Configure units that ask about
|
---|
638 | preprocessor symbols.
|
---|
639 |
|
---|
640 | =item C<cppsymbols>
|
---|
641 |
|
---|
642 | From F<Cppsym.U>:
|
---|
643 |
|
---|
644 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C preprocessor
|
---|
645 | alone. The symbols defined by cc or by cc when it calls cpp are
|
---|
646 | not in this list, see ccsymbols and cppccsymbols.
|
---|
647 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens.
|
---|
648 |
|
---|
649 | =item C<crypt_r_proto>
|
---|
650 |
|
---|
651 | From F<d_crypt_r.U>:
|
---|
652 |
|
---|
653 | This variable encodes the prototype of crypt_r.
|
---|
654 | It is zero if d_crypt_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
655 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_crypt_r
|
---|
656 | is defined.
|
---|
657 |
|
---|
658 | =item C<cryptlib>
|
---|
659 |
|
---|
660 | From F<d_crypt.U>:
|
---|
661 |
|
---|
662 | This variable holds -lcrypt or the path to a F<libcrypt.a> archive if
|
---|
663 | the crypt() function is not defined in the standard C library. It is
|
---|
664 | up to the Makefile to use this.
|
---|
665 |
|
---|
666 | =item C<csh>
|
---|
667 |
|
---|
668 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
669 |
|
---|
670 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
671 | full pathname (if any) of the csh program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
672 | the value is reset to a plain C<csh> and is not useful.
|
---|
673 |
|
---|
674 | =item C<ctermid_r_proto>
|
---|
675 |
|
---|
676 | From F<d_ctermid_r.U>:
|
---|
677 |
|
---|
678 | This variable encodes the prototype of ctermid_r.
|
---|
679 | It is zero if d_ctermid_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
680 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ctermid_r
|
---|
681 | is defined.
|
---|
682 |
|
---|
683 | =item C<ctime_r_proto>
|
---|
684 |
|
---|
685 | From F<d_ctime_r.U>:
|
---|
686 |
|
---|
687 | This variable encodes the prototype of ctime_r.
|
---|
688 | It is zero if d_ctime_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
689 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ctime_r
|
---|
690 | is defined.
|
---|
691 |
|
---|
692 | =back
|
---|
693 |
|
---|
694 | =head2 d
|
---|
695 |
|
---|
696 | =over 4
|
---|
697 |
|
---|
698 | =item C<d__fwalk>
|
---|
699 |
|
---|
700 | From F<d__fwalk.U>:
|
---|
701 |
|
---|
702 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS__FWALK> if _fwalk() is
|
---|
703 | available to apply a function to all the file handles.
|
---|
704 |
|
---|
705 | =item C<d_access>
|
---|
706 |
|
---|
707 | From F<d_access.U>:
|
---|
708 |
|
---|
709 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ACCESS> if the access() system
|
---|
710 | call is available to check for access permissions using real IDs.
|
---|
711 |
|
---|
712 | =item C<d_accessx>
|
---|
713 |
|
---|
714 | From F<d_accessx.U>:
|
---|
715 |
|
---|
716 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ACCESSX> symbol, which
|
---|
717 | indicates to the C program that the accessx() routine is available.
|
---|
718 |
|
---|
719 | =item C<d_aintl>
|
---|
720 |
|
---|
721 | From F<d_aintl.U>:
|
---|
722 |
|
---|
723 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_AINTL> symbol, which
|
---|
724 | indicates to the C program that the aintl() routine is available.
|
---|
725 | If copysignl is also present we can emulate modfl.
|
---|
726 |
|
---|
727 | =item C<d_alarm>
|
---|
728 |
|
---|
729 | From F<d_alarm.U>:
|
---|
730 |
|
---|
731 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ALARM> symbol, which
|
---|
732 | indicates to the C program that the alarm() routine is available.
|
---|
733 |
|
---|
734 | =item C<d_archlib>
|
---|
735 |
|
---|
736 | From F<archlib.U>:
|
---|
737 |
|
---|
738 | This variable conditionally defines C<ARCHLIB> to hold the pathname
|
---|
739 | of architecture-dependent library files for $package. If
|
---|
740 | $archlib is the same as $privlib, then this is set to undef.
|
---|
741 |
|
---|
742 | =item C<d_asctime_r>
|
---|
743 |
|
---|
744 | From F<d_asctime_r.U>:
|
---|
745 |
|
---|
746 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ASCTIME_R> symbol,
|
---|
747 | which indicates to the C program that the asctime_r()
|
---|
748 | routine is available.
|
---|
749 |
|
---|
750 | =item C<d_atolf>
|
---|
751 |
|
---|
752 | From F<atolf.U>:
|
---|
753 |
|
---|
754 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ATOLF> symbol, which
|
---|
755 | indicates to the C program that the atolf() routine is available.
|
---|
756 |
|
---|
757 | =item C<d_atoll>
|
---|
758 |
|
---|
759 | From F<atoll.U>:
|
---|
760 |
|
---|
761 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ATOLL> symbol, which
|
---|
762 | indicates to the C program that the atoll() routine is available.
|
---|
763 |
|
---|
764 | =item C<d_attribute_format>
|
---|
765 |
|
---|
766 | From F<d_attribut_format.U>:
|
---|
767 |
|
---|
768 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_FORMAT>, which
|
---|
769 | indicates the C compiler can check for printf-like formats.
|
---|
770 |
|
---|
771 | =item C<d_attribute_malloc>
|
---|
772 |
|
---|
773 | From F<d_attribute_malloc.U>:
|
---|
774 |
|
---|
775 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_MALLOC>, which
|
---|
776 | indicates the C compiler can understand functions as having
|
---|
777 | malloc-like semantics.
|
---|
778 |
|
---|
779 | =item C<d_attribute_nonnull>
|
---|
780 |
|
---|
781 | From F<d_attribute_nonnull.U>:
|
---|
782 |
|
---|
783 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_NONNULL>, which
|
---|
784 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain arguments
|
---|
785 | must not be C<NULL>, and will check accordingly at compile time.
|
---|
786 |
|
---|
787 | =item C<d_attribute_noreturn>
|
---|
788 |
|
---|
789 | From F<d_attribute_noreturn.U>:
|
---|
790 |
|
---|
791 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_NORETURN>, which
|
---|
792 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain functions
|
---|
793 | are guaranteed never to return.
|
---|
794 |
|
---|
795 | =item C<d_attribute_pure>
|
---|
796 |
|
---|
797 | From F<d_attribute_pure.U>:
|
---|
798 |
|
---|
799 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_PURE>, which
|
---|
800 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain functions
|
---|
801 | are C<pure> functions, meaning that they have no side effects, and
|
---|
802 | only rely on function input F<and/or> global data for their results.
|
---|
803 |
|
---|
804 | =item C<d_attribute_unused>
|
---|
805 |
|
---|
806 | From F<d_attribute_unused.U>:
|
---|
807 |
|
---|
808 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_UNUSED>, which
|
---|
809 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain variables
|
---|
810 | and arguments may not always be used, and to not throw warnings
|
---|
811 | if they don't get used.
|
---|
812 |
|
---|
813 | =item C<d_attribute_warn_unused_result>
|
---|
814 |
|
---|
815 | From F<d_attribute_warn_unused_result.U>:
|
---|
816 |
|
---|
817 | This variable conditionally defines
|
---|
818 | C<HASATTRIBUTE_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT>, which indicates that the C
|
---|
819 | compiler can know that certain functions have a return values
|
---|
820 | that must not be ignored, such as malloc() or open().
|
---|
821 |
|
---|
822 | =item C<d_bcmp>
|
---|
823 |
|
---|
824 | From F<d_bcmp.U>:
|
---|
825 |
|
---|
826 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BCMP> symbol if
|
---|
827 | the bcmp() routine is available to compare strings.
|
---|
828 |
|
---|
829 | =item C<d_bcopy>
|
---|
830 |
|
---|
831 | From F<d_bcopy.U>:
|
---|
832 |
|
---|
833 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BCOPY> symbol if
|
---|
834 | the bcopy() routine is available to copy strings.
|
---|
835 |
|
---|
836 | =item C<d_bsd>
|
---|
837 |
|
---|
838 | From F<Guess.U>:
|
---|
839 |
|
---|
840 | This symbol conditionally defines the symbol C<BSD> when running on a
|
---|
841 | C<BSD> system.
|
---|
842 |
|
---|
843 | =item C<d_bsdgetpgrp>
|
---|
844 |
|
---|
845 | From F<d_getpgrp.U>:
|
---|
846 |
|
---|
847 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_BSD_GETPGRP> if
|
---|
848 | getpgrp needs one arguments whereas C<USG> one needs none.
|
---|
849 |
|
---|
850 | =item C<d_bsdsetpgrp>
|
---|
851 |
|
---|
852 | From F<d_setpgrp.U>:
|
---|
853 |
|
---|
854 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_BSD_SETPGRP> if
|
---|
855 | setpgrp needs two arguments whereas C<USG> one needs none.
|
---|
856 | See also d_setpgid for a C<POSIX> interface.
|
---|
857 |
|
---|
858 | =item C<d_bzero>
|
---|
859 |
|
---|
860 | From F<d_bzero.U>:
|
---|
861 |
|
---|
862 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BZERO> symbol if
|
---|
863 | the bzero() routine is available to set memory to 0.
|
---|
864 |
|
---|
865 | =item C<d_casti32>
|
---|
866 |
|
---|
867 | From F<d_casti32.U>:
|
---|
868 |
|
---|
869 | This variable conditionally defines CASTI32, which indicates
|
---|
870 | whether the C compiler can cast large floats to 32-bit ints.
|
---|
871 |
|
---|
872 | =item C<d_castneg>
|
---|
873 |
|
---|
874 | From F<d_castneg.U>:
|
---|
875 |
|
---|
876 | This variable conditionally defines C<CASTNEG>, which indicates
|
---|
877 | wether the C compiler can cast negative float to unsigned.
|
---|
878 |
|
---|
879 | =item C<d_charvspr>
|
---|
880 |
|
---|
881 | From F<d_vprintf.U>:
|
---|
882 |
|
---|
883 | This variable conditionally defines C<CHARVSPRINTF> if this system
|
---|
884 | has vsprintf returning type (char*). The trend seems to be to
|
---|
885 | declare it as "int vsprintf()".
|
---|
886 |
|
---|
887 | =item C<d_chown>
|
---|
888 |
|
---|
889 | From F<d_chown.U>:
|
---|
890 |
|
---|
891 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CHOWN> symbol, which
|
---|
892 | indicates to the C program that the chown() routine is available.
|
---|
893 |
|
---|
894 | =item C<d_chroot>
|
---|
895 |
|
---|
896 | From F<d_chroot.U>:
|
---|
897 |
|
---|
898 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CHROOT> symbol, which
|
---|
899 | indicates to the C program that the chroot() routine is available.
|
---|
900 |
|
---|
901 | =item C<d_chsize>
|
---|
902 |
|
---|
903 | From F<d_chsize.U>:
|
---|
904 |
|
---|
905 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CHSIZE> symbol, which
|
---|
906 | indicates to the C program that the chsize() routine is available
|
---|
907 | to truncate files. You might need a -lx to get this routine.
|
---|
908 |
|
---|
909 | =item C<d_class>
|
---|
910 |
|
---|
911 | From F<d_class.U>:
|
---|
912 |
|
---|
913 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CLASS> symbol, which
|
---|
914 | indicates to the C program that the class() routine is available.
|
---|
915 |
|
---|
916 | =item C<d_clearenv>
|
---|
917 |
|
---|
918 | From F<d_clearenv.U>:
|
---|
919 |
|
---|
920 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CLEARENV> symbol, which
|
---|
921 | indicates to the C program that the clearenv () routine is available.
|
---|
922 |
|
---|
923 | =item C<d_closedir>
|
---|
924 |
|
---|
925 | From F<d_closedir.U>:
|
---|
926 |
|
---|
927 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_CLOSEDIR> if closedir() is
|
---|
928 | available.
|
---|
929 |
|
---|
930 | =item C<d_cmsghdr_s>
|
---|
931 |
|
---|
932 | From F<d_cmsghdr_s.U>:
|
---|
933 |
|
---|
934 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_CMSGHDR> symbol,
|
---|
935 | which indicates that the struct cmsghdr is supported.
|
---|
936 |
|
---|
937 | =item C<d_const>
|
---|
938 |
|
---|
939 | From F<d_const.U>:
|
---|
940 |
|
---|
941 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HASCONST> symbol, which
|
---|
942 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows about the
|
---|
943 | const type.
|
---|
944 |
|
---|
945 | =item C<d_copysignl>
|
---|
946 |
|
---|
947 | From F<d_copysignl.U>:
|
---|
948 |
|
---|
949 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_COPYSIGNL> symbol, which
|
---|
950 | indicates to the C program that the copysignl() routine is available.
|
---|
951 | If aintl is also present we can emulate modfl.
|
---|
952 |
|
---|
953 | =item C<d_crypt>
|
---|
954 |
|
---|
955 | From F<d_crypt.U>:
|
---|
956 |
|
---|
957 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CRYPT> symbol, which
|
---|
958 | indicates to the C program that the crypt() routine is available
|
---|
959 | to encrypt passwords and the like.
|
---|
960 |
|
---|
961 | =item C<d_crypt_r>
|
---|
962 |
|
---|
963 | From F<d_crypt_r.U>:
|
---|
964 |
|
---|
965 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CRYPT_R> symbol,
|
---|
966 | which indicates to the C program that the crypt_r()
|
---|
967 | routine is available.
|
---|
968 |
|
---|
969 | =item C<d_csh>
|
---|
970 |
|
---|
971 | From F<d_csh.U>:
|
---|
972 |
|
---|
973 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CSH> symbol, which
|
---|
974 | indicates to the C program that the C-shell exists.
|
---|
975 |
|
---|
976 | =item C<d_ctermid_r>
|
---|
977 |
|
---|
978 | From F<d_ctermid_r.U>:
|
---|
979 |
|
---|
980 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CTERMID_R> symbol,
|
---|
981 | which indicates to the C program that the ctermid_r()
|
---|
982 | routine is available.
|
---|
983 |
|
---|
984 | =item C<d_ctime_r>
|
---|
985 |
|
---|
986 | From F<d_ctime_r.U>:
|
---|
987 |
|
---|
988 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CTIME_R> symbol,
|
---|
989 | which indicates to the C program that the ctime_r()
|
---|
990 | routine is available.
|
---|
991 |
|
---|
992 | =item C<d_cuserid>
|
---|
993 |
|
---|
994 | From F<d_cuserid.U>:
|
---|
995 |
|
---|
996 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CUSERID> symbol, which
|
---|
997 | indicates to the C program that the cuserid() routine is available
|
---|
998 | to get character login names.
|
---|
999 |
|
---|
1000 | =item C<d_dbl_dig>
|
---|
1001 |
|
---|
1002 | From F<d_dbl_dig.U>:
|
---|
1003 |
|
---|
1004 | This variable conditionally defines d_dbl_dig if this system's
|
---|
1005 | header files provide C<DBL_DIG>, which is the number of significant
|
---|
1006 | digits in a double precision number.
|
---|
1007 |
|
---|
1008 | =item C<d_dbminitproto>
|
---|
1009 |
|
---|
1010 | From F<d_dbminitproto.U>:
|
---|
1011 |
|
---|
1012 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DBMINIT_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
1013 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
1014 | a prototype for the dbminit() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
1015 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
1016 |
|
---|
1017 | =item C<d_difftime>
|
---|
1018 |
|
---|
1019 | From F<d_difftime.U>:
|
---|
1020 |
|
---|
1021 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DIFFTIME> symbol, which
|
---|
1022 | indicates to the C program that the difftime() routine is available.
|
---|
1023 |
|
---|
1024 | =item C<d_dirfd>
|
---|
1025 |
|
---|
1026 | From F<d_dirfd.U>:
|
---|
1027 |
|
---|
1028 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DIRFD> constant,
|
---|
1029 | which indicates to the C program that dirfd() is available
|
---|
1030 | to return the file descriptor of a directory stream.
|
---|
1031 |
|
---|
1032 | =item C<d_dirnamlen>
|
---|
1033 |
|
---|
1034 | From F<i_dirent.U>:
|
---|
1035 |
|
---|
1036 | This variable conditionally defines C<DIRNAMLEN>, which indicates
|
---|
1037 | to the C program that the length of directory entry names is
|
---|
1038 | provided by a d_namelen field.
|
---|
1039 |
|
---|
1040 | =item C<d_dlerror>
|
---|
1041 |
|
---|
1042 | From F<d_dlerror.U>:
|
---|
1043 |
|
---|
1044 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DLERROR> symbol, which
|
---|
1045 | indicates to the C program that the dlerror() routine is available.
|
---|
1046 |
|
---|
1047 | =item C<d_dlopen>
|
---|
1048 |
|
---|
1049 | From F<d_dlopen.U>:
|
---|
1050 |
|
---|
1051 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DLOPEN> symbol, which
|
---|
1052 | indicates to the C program that the dlopen() routine is available.
|
---|
1053 |
|
---|
1054 | =item C<d_dlsymun>
|
---|
1055 |
|
---|
1056 | From F<d_dlsymun.U>:
|
---|
1057 |
|
---|
1058 | This variable conditionally defines C<DLSYM_NEEDS_UNDERSCORE>, which
|
---|
1059 | indicates that we need to prepend an underscore to the symbol
|
---|
1060 | name before calling dlsym().
|
---|
1061 |
|
---|
1062 | =item C<d_dosuid>
|
---|
1063 |
|
---|
1064 | From F<d_dosuid.U>:
|
---|
1065 |
|
---|
1066 | This variable conditionally defines the symbol C<DOSUID>, which
|
---|
1067 | tells the C program that it should insert setuid emulation code
|
---|
1068 | on hosts which have setuid #! scripts disabled.
|
---|
1069 |
|
---|
1070 | =item C<d_drand48_r>
|
---|
1071 |
|
---|
1072 | From F<d_drand48_r.U>:
|
---|
1073 |
|
---|
1074 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_DRAND48_R symbol,
|
---|
1075 | which indicates to the C program that the drand48_r()
|
---|
1076 | routine is available.
|
---|
1077 |
|
---|
1078 | =item C<d_drand48proto>
|
---|
1079 |
|
---|
1080 | From F<d_drand48proto.U>:
|
---|
1081 |
|
---|
1082 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_DRAND48_PROTO symbol,
|
---|
1083 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
1084 | a prototype for the drand48() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
1085 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
1086 |
|
---|
1087 | =item C<d_dup2>
|
---|
1088 |
|
---|
1089 | From F<d_dup2.U>:
|
---|
1090 |
|
---|
1091 | This variable conditionally defines HAS_DUP2 if dup2() is
|
---|
1092 | available to duplicate file descriptors.
|
---|
1093 |
|
---|
1094 | =item C<d_eaccess>
|
---|
1095 |
|
---|
1096 | From F<d_eaccess.U>:
|
---|
1097 |
|
---|
1098 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_EACCESS> symbol, which
|
---|
1099 | indicates to the C program that the eaccess() routine is available.
|
---|
1100 |
|
---|
1101 | =item C<d_endgrent>
|
---|
1102 |
|
---|
1103 | From F<d_endgrent.U>:
|
---|
1104 |
|
---|
1105 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDGRENT> symbol, which
|
---|
1106 | indicates to the C program that the endgrent() routine is available
|
---|
1107 | for sequential access of the group database.
|
---|
1108 |
|
---|
1109 | =item C<d_endgrent_r>
|
---|
1110 |
|
---|
1111 | From F<d_endgrent_r.U>:
|
---|
1112 |
|
---|
1113 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDGRENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1114 | which indicates to the C program that the endgrent_r()
|
---|
1115 | routine is available.
|
---|
1116 |
|
---|
1117 | =item C<d_endhent>
|
---|
1118 |
|
---|
1119 | From F<d_endhent.U>:
|
---|
1120 |
|
---|
1121 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDHOSTENT> if endhostent() is
|
---|
1122 | available to close whatever was being used for host queries.
|
---|
1123 |
|
---|
1124 | =item C<d_endhostent_r>
|
---|
1125 |
|
---|
1126 | From F<d_endhostent_r.U>:
|
---|
1127 |
|
---|
1128 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDHOSTENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1129 | which indicates to the C program that the endhostent_r()
|
---|
1130 | routine is available.
|
---|
1131 |
|
---|
1132 | =item C<d_endnent>
|
---|
1133 |
|
---|
1134 | From F<d_endnent.U>:
|
---|
1135 |
|
---|
1136 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDNETENT> if endnetent() is
|
---|
1137 | available to close whatever was being used for network queries.
|
---|
1138 |
|
---|
1139 | =item C<d_endnetent_r>
|
---|
1140 |
|
---|
1141 | From F<d_endnetent_r.U>:
|
---|
1142 |
|
---|
1143 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDNETENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1144 | which indicates to the C program that the endnetent_r()
|
---|
1145 | routine is available.
|
---|
1146 |
|
---|
1147 | =item C<d_endpent>
|
---|
1148 |
|
---|
1149 | From F<d_endpent.U>:
|
---|
1150 |
|
---|
1151 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDPROTOENT> if endprotoent() is
|
---|
1152 | available to close whatever was being used for protocol queries.
|
---|
1153 |
|
---|
1154 | =item C<d_endprotoent_r>
|
---|
1155 |
|
---|
1156 | From F<d_endprotoent_r.U>:
|
---|
1157 |
|
---|
1158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPROTOENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1159 | which indicates to the C program that the endprotoent_r()
|
---|
1160 | routine is available.
|
---|
1161 |
|
---|
1162 | =item C<d_endpwent>
|
---|
1163 |
|
---|
1164 | From F<d_endpwent.U>:
|
---|
1165 |
|
---|
1166 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPWENT> symbol, which
|
---|
1167 | indicates to the C program that the endpwent() routine is available
|
---|
1168 | for sequential access of the passwd database.
|
---|
1169 |
|
---|
1170 | =item C<d_endpwent_r>
|
---|
1171 |
|
---|
1172 | From F<d_endpwent_r.U>:
|
---|
1173 |
|
---|
1174 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPWENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1175 | which indicates to the C program that the endpwent_r()
|
---|
1176 | routine is available.
|
---|
1177 |
|
---|
1178 | =item C<d_endsent>
|
---|
1179 |
|
---|
1180 | From F<d_endsent.U>:
|
---|
1181 |
|
---|
1182 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDSERVENT> if endservent() is
|
---|
1183 | available to close whatever was being used for service queries.
|
---|
1184 |
|
---|
1185 | =item C<d_endservent_r>
|
---|
1186 |
|
---|
1187 | From F<d_endservent_r.U>:
|
---|
1188 |
|
---|
1189 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDSERVENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1190 | which indicates to the C program that the endservent_r()
|
---|
1191 | routine is available.
|
---|
1192 |
|
---|
1193 | =item C<d_eofnblk>
|
---|
1194 |
|
---|
1195 | From F<nblock_io.U>:
|
---|
1196 |
|
---|
1197 | This variable conditionally defines C<EOF_NONBLOCK> if C<EOF> can be seen
|
---|
1198 | when reading from a non-blocking I/O source.
|
---|
1199 |
|
---|
1200 | =item C<d_eunice>
|
---|
1201 |
|
---|
1202 | From F<Guess.U>:
|
---|
1203 |
|
---|
1204 | This variable conditionally defines the symbols C<EUNICE> and C<VAX>, which
|
---|
1205 | alerts the C program that it must deal with ideosyncracies of C<VMS>.
|
---|
1206 |
|
---|
1207 | =item C<d_faststdio>
|
---|
1208 |
|
---|
1209 | From F<d_faststdio.U>:
|
---|
1210 |
|
---|
1211 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FAST_STDIO> symbol,
|
---|
1212 | which indicates to the C program that the "fast stdio" is available
|
---|
1213 | to manipulate the stdio buffers directly.
|
---|
1214 |
|
---|
1215 | =item C<d_fchdir>
|
---|
1216 |
|
---|
1217 | From F<d_fchdir.U>:
|
---|
1218 |
|
---|
1219 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHDIR> symbol, which
|
---|
1220 | indicates to the C program that the fchdir() routine is available.
|
---|
1221 |
|
---|
1222 | =item C<d_fchmod>
|
---|
1223 |
|
---|
1224 | From F<d_fchmod.U>:
|
---|
1225 |
|
---|
1226 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHMOD> symbol, which
|
---|
1227 | indicates to the C program that the fchmod() routine is available
|
---|
1228 | to change mode of opened files.
|
---|
1229 |
|
---|
1230 | =item C<d_fchown>
|
---|
1231 |
|
---|
1232 | From F<d_fchown.U>:
|
---|
1233 |
|
---|
1234 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHOWN> symbol, which
|
---|
1235 | indicates to the C program that the fchown() routine is available
|
---|
1236 | to change ownership of opened files.
|
---|
1237 |
|
---|
1238 | =item C<d_fcntl>
|
---|
1239 |
|
---|
1240 | From F<d_fcntl.U>:
|
---|
1241 |
|
---|
1242 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCNTL> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
1243 | whether the fcntl() function exists
|
---|
1244 |
|
---|
1245 | =item C<d_fcntl_can_lock>
|
---|
1246 |
|
---|
1247 | From F<d_fcntl_can_lock.U>:
|
---|
1248 |
|
---|
1249 | This variable conditionally defines the C<FCNTL_CAN_LOCK> symbol
|
---|
1250 | and indicates whether file locking with fcntl() works.
|
---|
1251 |
|
---|
1252 | =item C<d_fd_macros>
|
---|
1253 |
|
---|
1254 | From F<d_fd_set.U>:
|
---|
1255 |
|
---|
1256 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FD_MACROS> symbol,
|
---|
1257 | which indicates if your C compiler knows about the macros which
|
---|
1258 | manipulate an fd_set.
|
---|
1259 |
|
---|
1260 | =item C<d_fd_set>
|
---|
1261 |
|
---|
1262 | From F<d_fd_set.U>:
|
---|
1263 |
|
---|
1264 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FD_SET> symbol,
|
---|
1265 | which indicates if your C compiler knows about the fd_set typedef.
|
---|
1266 |
|
---|
1267 | =item C<d_fds_bits>
|
---|
1268 |
|
---|
1269 | From F<d_fd_set.U>:
|
---|
1270 |
|
---|
1271 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FDS_BITS> symbol,
|
---|
1272 | which indicates if your fd_set typedef contains the fds_bits member.
|
---|
1273 | If you have an fd_set typedef, but the dweebs who installed it did
|
---|
1274 | a half-fast job and neglected to provide the macros to manipulate
|
---|
1275 | an fd_set, C<HAS_FDS_BITS> will let us know how to fix the gaffe.
|
---|
1276 |
|
---|
1277 | =item C<d_fgetpos>
|
---|
1278 |
|
---|
1279 | From F<d_fgetpos.U>:
|
---|
1280 |
|
---|
1281 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FGETPOS> if fgetpos() is
|
---|
1282 | available to get the file position indicator.
|
---|
1283 |
|
---|
1284 | =item C<d_finite>
|
---|
1285 |
|
---|
1286 | From F<d_finite.U>:
|
---|
1287 |
|
---|
1288 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FINITE> symbol, which
|
---|
1289 | indicates to the C program that the finite() routine is available.
|
---|
1290 |
|
---|
1291 | =item C<d_finitel>
|
---|
1292 |
|
---|
1293 | From F<d_finitel.U>:
|
---|
1294 |
|
---|
1295 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FINITEL> symbol, which
|
---|
1296 | indicates to the C program that the finitel() routine is available.
|
---|
1297 |
|
---|
1298 | =item C<d_flexfnam>
|
---|
1299 |
|
---|
1300 | From F<d_flexfnam.U>:
|
---|
1301 |
|
---|
1302 | This variable conditionally defines the C<FLEXFILENAMES> symbol, which
|
---|
1303 | indicates that the system supports filenames longer than 14 characters.
|
---|
1304 |
|
---|
1305 | =item C<d_flock>
|
---|
1306 |
|
---|
1307 | From F<d_flock.U>:
|
---|
1308 |
|
---|
1309 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FLOCK> if flock() is
|
---|
1310 | available to do file locking.
|
---|
1311 |
|
---|
1312 | =item C<d_flockproto>
|
---|
1313 |
|
---|
1314 | From F<d_flockproto.U>:
|
---|
1315 |
|
---|
1316 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FLOCK_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
1317 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
1318 | a prototype for the flock() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
1319 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
1320 |
|
---|
1321 | =item C<d_fork>
|
---|
1322 |
|
---|
1323 | From F<d_fork.U>:
|
---|
1324 |
|
---|
1325 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FORK> symbol, which
|
---|
1326 | indicates to the C program that the fork() routine is available.
|
---|
1327 |
|
---|
1328 | =item C<d_fp_class>
|
---|
1329 |
|
---|
1330 | From F<d_fp_class.U>:
|
---|
1331 |
|
---|
1332 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FP_CLASS> symbol, which
|
---|
1333 | indicates to the C program that the fp_class() routine is available.
|
---|
1334 |
|
---|
1335 | =item C<d_fpathconf>
|
---|
1336 |
|
---|
1337 | From F<d_pathconf.U>:
|
---|
1338 |
|
---|
1339 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPATHCONF> symbol, which
|
---|
1340 | indicates to the C program that the pathconf() routine is available
|
---|
1341 | to determine file-system related limits and options associated
|
---|
1342 | with a given open file descriptor.
|
---|
1343 |
|
---|
1344 | =item C<d_fpclass>
|
---|
1345 |
|
---|
1346 | From F<d_fpclass.U>:
|
---|
1347 |
|
---|
1348 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASS> symbol, which
|
---|
1349 | indicates to the C program that the fpclass() routine is available.
|
---|
1350 |
|
---|
1351 | =item C<d_fpclassify>
|
---|
1352 |
|
---|
1353 | From F<d_fpclassify.U>:
|
---|
1354 |
|
---|
1355 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASSIFY> symbol, which
|
---|
1356 | indicates to the C program that the fpclassify() routine is available.
|
---|
1357 |
|
---|
1358 | =item C<d_fpclassl>
|
---|
1359 |
|
---|
1360 | From F<d_fpclassl.U>:
|
---|
1361 |
|
---|
1362 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASSL> symbol, which
|
---|
1363 | indicates to the C program that the fpclassl() routine is available.
|
---|
1364 |
|
---|
1365 | =item C<d_fpos64_t>
|
---|
1366 |
|
---|
1367 | From F<d_fpos64_t.U>:
|
---|
1368 |
|
---|
1369 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports fpos64_t.
|
---|
1370 |
|
---|
1371 | =item C<d_frexpl>
|
---|
1372 |
|
---|
1373 | From F<d_frexpl.U>:
|
---|
1374 |
|
---|
1375 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FREXPL> symbol, which
|
---|
1376 | indicates to the C program that the frexpl() routine is available.
|
---|
1377 |
|
---|
1378 | =item C<d_fs_data_s>
|
---|
1379 |
|
---|
1380 | From F<d_fs_data_s.U>:
|
---|
1381 |
|
---|
1382 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_FS_DATA> symbol,
|
---|
1383 | which indicates that the struct fs_data is supported.
|
---|
1384 |
|
---|
1385 | =item C<d_fseeko>
|
---|
1386 |
|
---|
1387 | From F<d_fseeko.U>:
|
---|
1388 |
|
---|
1389 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSEEKO> symbol, which
|
---|
1390 | indicates to the C program that the fseeko() routine is available.
|
---|
1391 |
|
---|
1392 | =item C<d_fsetpos>
|
---|
1393 |
|
---|
1394 | From F<d_fsetpos.U>:
|
---|
1395 |
|
---|
1396 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FSETPOS> if fsetpos() is
|
---|
1397 | available to set the file position indicator.
|
---|
1398 |
|
---|
1399 | =item C<d_fstatfs>
|
---|
1400 |
|
---|
1401 | From F<d_fstatfs.U>:
|
---|
1402 |
|
---|
1403 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSTATFS> symbol, which
|
---|
1404 | indicates to the C program that the fstatfs() routine is available.
|
---|
1405 |
|
---|
1406 | =item C<d_fstatvfs>
|
---|
1407 |
|
---|
1408 | From F<d_statvfs.U>:
|
---|
1409 |
|
---|
1410 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSTATVFS> symbol, which
|
---|
1411 | indicates to the C program that the fstatvfs() routine is available.
|
---|
1412 |
|
---|
1413 | =item C<d_fsync>
|
---|
1414 |
|
---|
1415 | From F<d_fsync.U>:
|
---|
1416 |
|
---|
1417 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSYNC> symbol, which
|
---|
1418 | indicates to the C program that the fsync() routine is available.
|
---|
1419 |
|
---|
1420 | =item C<d_ftello>
|
---|
1421 |
|
---|
1422 | From F<d_ftello.U>:
|
---|
1423 |
|
---|
1424 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FTELLO> symbol, which
|
---|
1425 | indicates to the C program that the ftello() routine is available.
|
---|
1426 |
|
---|
1427 | =item C<d_ftime>
|
---|
1428 |
|
---|
1429 | From F<d_ftime.U>:
|
---|
1430 |
|
---|
1431 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FTIME> symbol, which indicates
|
---|
1432 | that the ftime() routine exists. The ftime() routine is basically
|
---|
1433 | a sub-second accuracy clock.
|
---|
1434 |
|
---|
1435 | =item C<d_futimes>
|
---|
1436 |
|
---|
1437 | From F<f_futimes.U>:
|
---|
1438 |
|
---|
1439 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FUTIMES> symbol, which
|
---|
1440 | indicates to the C program that the futimes() routine is available.
|
---|
1441 |
|
---|
1442 | =item C<d_Gconvert>
|
---|
1443 |
|
---|
1444 | From F<d_gconvert.U>:
|
---|
1445 |
|
---|
1446 | This variable holds what Gconvert is defined as to convert
|
---|
1447 | floating point numbers into strings. By default, Configure
|
---|
1448 | sets C<this> macro to use the first of gconvert, gcvt, or sprintf
|
---|
1449 | that pass sprintf-%g-like behaviour tests. If perl is using
|
---|
1450 | long doubles, the macro uses the first of the following
|
---|
1451 | functions that pass Configure's tests: qgcvt, sprintf (if
|
---|
1452 | Configure knows how to make sprintf format long doubles--see
|
---|
1453 | sPRIgldbl), gconvert, gcvt, and sprintf (casting to double).
|
---|
1454 | The gconvert_preference and gconvert_ld_preference variables
|
---|
1455 | can be used to alter Configure's preferences, for doubles and
|
---|
1456 | long doubles, respectively. If present, they contain a
|
---|
1457 | space-separated list of one or more of the above function
|
---|
1458 | names in the order they should be tried.
|
---|
1459 |
|
---|
1460 | d_Gconvert may be set to override Configure with a platform-
|
---|
1461 | specific function. If this function expects a double, a
|
---|
1462 | different value may need to be set by the F<uselongdouble.cbu>
|
---|
1463 | call-back unit so that long doubles can be formatted without
|
---|
1464 | loss of precision.
|
---|
1465 |
|
---|
1466 | =item C<d_getcwd>
|
---|
1467 |
|
---|
1468 | From F<d_getcwd.U>:
|
---|
1469 |
|
---|
1470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETCWD> symbol, which
|
---|
1471 | indicates to the C program that the getcwd() routine is available
|
---|
1472 | to get the current working directory.
|
---|
1473 |
|
---|
1474 | =item C<d_getespwnam>
|
---|
1475 |
|
---|
1476 | From F<d_getespwnam.U>:
|
---|
1477 |
|
---|
1478 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETESPWNAM> if getespwnam() is
|
---|
1479 | available to retrieve enchanced (shadow) password entries by name.
|
---|
1480 |
|
---|
1481 | =item C<d_getfsstat>
|
---|
1482 |
|
---|
1483 | From F<d_getfsstat.U>:
|
---|
1484 |
|
---|
1485 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETFSSTAT> symbol, which
|
---|
1486 | indicates to the C program that the getfsstat() routine is available.
|
---|
1487 |
|
---|
1488 | =item C<d_getgrent>
|
---|
1489 |
|
---|
1490 | From F<d_getgrent.U>:
|
---|
1491 |
|
---|
1492 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRENT> symbol, which
|
---|
1493 | indicates to the C program that the getgrent() routine is available
|
---|
1494 | for sequential access of the group database.
|
---|
1495 |
|
---|
1496 | =item C<d_getgrent_r>
|
---|
1497 |
|
---|
1498 | From F<d_getgrent_r.U>:
|
---|
1499 |
|
---|
1500 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1501 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrent_r()
|
---|
1502 | routine is available.
|
---|
1503 |
|
---|
1504 | =item C<d_getgrgid_r>
|
---|
1505 |
|
---|
1506 | From F<d_getgrgid_r.U>:
|
---|
1507 |
|
---|
1508 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRGID_R> symbol,
|
---|
1509 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrgid_r()
|
---|
1510 | routine is available.
|
---|
1511 |
|
---|
1512 | =item C<d_getgrnam_r>
|
---|
1513 |
|
---|
1514 | From F<d_getgrnam_r.U>:
|
---|
1515 |
|
---|
1516 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRNAM_R> symbol,
|
---|
1517 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrnam_r()
|
---|
1518 | routine is available.
|
---|
1519 |
|
---|
1520 | =item C<d_getgrps>
|
---|
1521 |
|
---|
1522 | From F<d_getgrps.U>:
|
---|
1523 |
|
---|
1524 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGROUPS> symbol, which
|
---|
1525 | indicates to the C program that the getgroups() routine is available
|
---|
1526 | to get the list of process groups.
|
---|
1527 |
|
---|
1528 | =item C<d_gethbyaddr>
|
---|
1529 |
|
---|
1530 | From F<d_gethbyad.U>:
|
---|
1531 |
|
---|
1532 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYADDR> symbol, which
|
---|
1533 | indicates to the C program that the gethostbyaddr() routine is available
|
---|
1534 | to look up hosts by their C<IP> addresses.
|
---|
1535 |
|
---|
1536 | =item C<d_gethbyname>
|
---|
1537 |
|
---|
1538 | From F<d_gethbynm.U>:
|
---|
1539 |
|
---|
1540 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYNAME> symbol, which
|
---|
1541 | indicates to the C program that the gethostbyname() routine is available
|
---|
1542 | to look up host names in some data base or other.
|
---|
1543 |
|
---|
1544 | =item C<d_gethent>
|
---|
1545 |
|
---|
1546 | From F<d_gethent.U>:
|
---|
1547 |
|
---|
1548 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETHOSTENT> if gethostent() is
|
---|
1549 | available to look up host names in some data base or another.
|
---|
1550 |
|
---|
1551 | =item C<d_gethname>
|
---|
1552 |
|
---|
1553 | From F<d_gethname.U>:
|
---|
1554 |
|
---|
1555 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTNAME> symbol, which
|
---|
1556 | indicates to the C program that the gethostname() routine may be
|
---|
1557 | used to derive the host name.
|
---|
1558 |
|
---|
1559 | =item C<d_gethostbyaddr_r>
|
---|
1560 |
|
---|
1561 | From F<d_gethostbyaddr_r.U>:
|
---|
1562 |
|
---|
1563 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYADDR_R> symbol,
|
---|
1564 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostbyaddr_r()
|
---|
1565 | routine is available.
|
---|
1566 |
|
---|
1567 | =item C<d_gethostbyname_r>
|
---|
1568 |
|
---|
1569 | From F<d_gethostbyname_r.U>:
|
---|
1570 |
|
---|
1571 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYNAME_R> symbol,
|
---|
1572 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostbyname_r()
|
---|
1573 | routine is available.
|
---|
1574 |
|
---|
1575 | =item C<d_gethostent_r>
|
---|
1576 |
|
---|
1577 | From F<d_gethostent_r.U>:
|
---|
1578 |
|
---|
1579 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1580 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostent_r()
|
---|
1581 | routine is available.
|
---|
1582 |
|
---|
1583 | =item C<d_gethostprotos>
|
---|
1584 |
|
---|
1585 | From F<d_gethostprotos.U>:
|
---|
1586 |
|
---|
1587 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOST_PROTOS> symbol,
|
---|
1588 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies
|
---|
1589 | prototypes for the various gethost*() functions.
|
---|
1590 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types.
|
---|
1591 |
|
---|
1592 | =item C<d_getitimer>
|
---|
1593 |
|
---|
1594 | From F<d_getitimer.U>:
|
---|
1595 |
|
---|
1596 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETITIMER> symbol, which
|
---|
1597 | indicates to the C program that the getitimer() routine is available.
|
---|
1598 |
|
---|
1599 | =item C<d_getlogin>
|
---|
1600 |
|
---|
1601 | From F<d_getlogin.U>:
|
---|
1602 |
|
---|
1603 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETLOGIN> symbol, which
|
---|
1604 | indicates to the C program that the getlogin() routine is available
|
---|
1605 | to get the login name.
|
---|
1606 |
|
---|
1607 | =item C<d_getlogin_r>
|
---|
1608 |
|
---|
1609 | From F<d_getlogin_r.U>:
|
---|
1610 |
|
---|
1611 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETLOGIN_R> symbol,
|
---|
1612 | which indicates to the C program that the getlogin_r()
|
---|
1613 | routine is available.
|
---|
1614 |
|
---|
1615 | =item C<d_getmnt>
|
---|
1616 |
|
---|
1617 | From F<d_getmnt.U>:
|
---|
1618 |
|
---|
1619 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETMNT> symbol, which
|
---|
1620 | indicates to the C program that the getmnt() routine is available
|
---|
1621 | to retrieve one or more mount info blocks by filename.
|
---|
1622 |
|
---|
1623 | =item C<d_getmntent>
|
---|
1624 |
|
---|
1625 | From F<d_getmntent.U>:
|
---|
1626 |
|
---|
1627 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETMNTENT> symbol, which
|
---|
1628 | indicates to the C program that the getmntent() routine is available
|
---|
1629 | to iterate through mounted files to get their mount info.
|
---|
1630 |
|
---|
1631 | =item C<d_getnbyaddr>
|
---|
1632 |
|
---|
1633 | From F<d_getnbyad.U>:
|
---|
1634 |
|
---|
1635 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYADDR> symbol, which
|
---|
1636 | indicates to the C program that the getnetbyaddr() routine is available
|
---|
1637 | to look up networks by their C<IP> addresses.
|
---|
1638 |
|
---|
1639 | =item C<d_getnbyname>
|
---|
1640 |
|
---|
1641 | From F<d_getnbynm.U>:
|
---|
1642 |
|
---|
1643 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYNAME> symbol, which
|
---|
1644 | indicates to the C program that the getnetbyname() routine is available
|
---|
1645 | to look up networks by their names.
|
---|
1646 |
|
---|
1647 | =item C<d_getnent>
|
---|
1648 |
|
---|
1649 | From F<d_getnent.U>:
|
---|
1650 |
|
---|
1651 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETNETENT> if getnetent() is
|
---|
1652 | available to look up network names in some data base or another.
|
---|
1653 |
|
---|
1654 | =item C<d_getnetbyaddr_r>
|
---|
1655 |
|
---|
1656 | From F<d_getnetbyaddr_r.U>:
|
---|
1657 |
|
---|
1658 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYADDR_R> symbol,
|
---|
1659 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetbyaddr_r()
|
---|
1660 | routine is available.
|
---|
1661 |
|
---|
1662 | =item C<d_getnetbyname_r>
|
---|
1663 |
|
---|
1664 | From F<d_getnetbyname_r.U>:
|
---|
1665 |
|
---|
1666 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYNAME_R> symbol,
|
---|
1667 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetbyname_r()
|
---|
1668 | routine is available.
|
---|
1669 |
|
---|
1670 | =item C<d_getnetent_r>
|
---|
1671 |
|
---|
1672 | From F<d_getnetent_r.U>:
|
---|
1673 |
|
---|
1674 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1675 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetent_r()
|
---|
1676 | routine is available.
|
---|
1677 |
|
---|
1678 | =item C<d_getnetprotos>
|
---|
1679 |
|
---|
1680 | From F<d_getnetprotos.U>:
|
---|
1681 |
|
---|
1682 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNET_PROTOS> symbol,
|
---|
1683 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies
|
---|
1684 | prototypes for the various getnet*() functions.
|
---|
1685 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types.
|
---|
1686 |
|
---|
1687 | =item C<d_getpagsz>
|
---|
1688 |
|
---|
1689 | From F<d_getpagsz.U>:
|
---|
1690 |
|
---|
1691 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPAGESIZE> if getpagesize()
|
---|
1692 | is available to get the system page size.
|
---|
1693 |
|
---|
1694 | =item C<d_getpbyname>
|
---|
1695 |
|
---|
1696 | From F<d_getprotby.U>:
|
---|
1697 |
|
---|
1698 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNAME>
|
---|
1699 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the
|
---|
1700 | getprotobyname() routine is available to look up protocols
|
---|
1701 | by their name.
|
---|
1702 |
|
---|
1703 | =item C<d_getpbynumber>
|
---|
1704 |
|
---|
1705 | From F<d_getprotby.U>:
|
---|
1706 |
|
---|
1707 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNUMBER>
|
---|
1708 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the
|
---|
1709 | getprotobynumber() routine is available to look up protocols
|
---|
1710 | by their number.
|
---|
1711 |
|
---|
1712 | =item C<d_getpent>
|
---|
1713 |
|
---|
1714 | From F<d_getpent.U>:
|
---|
1715 |
|
---|
1716 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPROTOENT> if getprotoent() is
|
---|
1717 | available to look up protocols in some data base or another.
|
---|
1718 |
|
---|
1719 | =item C<d_getpgid>
|
---|
1720 |
|
---|
1721 | From F<d_getpgid.U>:
|
---|
1722 |
|
---|
1723 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPGID> symbol, which
|
---|
1724 | indicates to the C program that the getpgid(pid) function
|
---|
1725 | is available to get the process group id.
|
---|
1726 |
|
---|
1727 | =item C<d_getpgrp2>
|
---|
1728 |
|
---|
1729 | From F<d_getpgrp2.U>:
|
---|
1730 |
|
---|
1731 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_GETPGRP2 symbol, which
|
---|
1732 | indicates to the C program that the getpgrp2() (as in F<DG/C<UX>>) routine
|
---|
1733 | is available to get the current process group.
|
---|
1734 |
|
---|
1735 | =item C<d_getpgrp>
|
---|
1736 |
|
---|
1737 | From F<d_getpgrp.U>:
|
---|
1738 |
|
---|
1739 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPGRP> if getpgrp() is
|
---|
1740 | available to get the current process group.
|
---|
1741 |
|
---|
1742 | =item C<d_getppid>
|
---|
1743 |
|
---|
1744 | From F<d_getppid.U>:
|
---|
1745 |
|
---|
1746 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPPID> symbol, which
|
---|
1747 | indicates to the C program that the getppid() routine is available
|
---|
1748 | to get the parent process C<ID>.
|
---|
1749 |
|
---|
1750 | =item C<d_getprior>
|
---|
1751 |
|
---|
1752 | From F<d_getprior.U>:
|
---|
1753 |
|
---|
1754 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPRIORITY> if getpriority()
|
---|
1755 | is available to get a process's priority.
|
---|
1756 |
|
---|
1757 | =item C<d_getprotobyname_r>
|
---|
1758 |
|
---|
1759 | From F<d_getprotobyname_r.U>:
|
---|
1760 |
|
---|
1761 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNAME_R> symbol,
|
---|
1762 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotobyname_r()
|
---|
1763 | routine is available.
|
---|
1764 |
|
---|
1765 | =item C<d_getprotobynumber_r>
|
---|
1766 |
|
---|
1767 | From F<d_getprotobynumber_r.U>:
|
---|
1768 |
|
---|
1769 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNUMBER_R> symbol,
|
---|
1770 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotobynumber_r()
|
---|
1771 | routine is available.
|
---|
1772 |
|
---|
1773 | =item C<d_getprotoent_r>
|
---|
1774 |
|
---|
1775 | From F<d_getprotoent_r.U>:
|
---|
1776 |
|
---|
1777 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1778 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotoent_r()
|
---|
1779 | routine is available.
|
---|
1780 |
|
---|
1781 | =item C<d_getprotoprotos>
|
---|
1782 |
|
---|
1783 | From F<d_getprotoprotos.U>:
|
---|
1784 |
|
---|
1785 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTO_PROTOS> symbol,
|
---|
1786 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies
|
---|
1787 | prototypes for the various getproto*() functions.
|
---|
1788 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types.
|
---|
1789 |
|
---|
1790 | =item C<d_getprpwnam>
|
---|
1791 |
|
---|
1792 | From F<d_getprpwnam.U>:
|
---|
1793 |
|
---|
1794 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPRPWNAM> if getprpwnam() is
|
---|
1795 | available to retrieve protected (shadow) password entries by name.
|
---|
1796 |
|
---|
1797 | =item C<d_getpwent>
|
---|
1798 |
|
---|
1799 | From F<d_getpwent.U>:
|
---|
1800 |
|
---|
1801 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWENT> symbol, which
|
---|
1802 | indicates to the C program that the getpwent() routine is available
|
---|
1803 | for sequential access of the passwd database.
|
---|
1804 |
|
---|
1805 | =item C<d_getpwent_r>
|
---|
1806 |
|
---|
1807 | From F<d_getpwent_r.U>:
|
---|
1808 |
|
---|
1809 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1810 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwent_r()
|
---|
1811 | routine is available.
|
---|
1812 |
|
---|
1813 | =item C<d_getpwnam_r>
|
---|
1814 |
|
---|
1815 | From F<d_getpwnam_r.U>:
|
---|
1816 |
|
---|
1817 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWNAM_R> symbol,
|
---|
1818 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwnam_r()
|
---|
1819 | routine is available.
|
---|
1820 |
|
---|
1821 | =item C<d_getpwuid_r>
|
---|
1822 |
|
---|
1823 | From F<d_getpwuid_r.U>:
|
---|
1824 |
|
---|
1825 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWUID_R> symbol,
|
---|
1826 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwuid_r()
|
---|
1827 | routine is available.
|
---|
1828 |
|
---|
1829 | =item C<d_getsbyname>
|
---|
1830 |
|
---|
1831 | From F<d_getsrvby.U>:
|
---|
1832 |
|
---|
1833 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYNAME>
|
---|
1834 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the
|
---|
1835 | getservbyname() routine is available to look up services
|
---|
1836 | by their name.
|
---|
1837 |
|
---|
1838 | =item C<d_getsbyport>
|
---|
1839 |
|
---|
1840 | From F<d_getsrvby.U>:
|
---|
1841 |
|
---|
1842 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYPORT>
|
---|
1843 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the
|
---|
1844 | getservbyport() routine is available to look up services
|
---|
1845 | by their port.
|
---|
1846 |
|
---|
1847 | =item C<d_getsent>
|
---|
1848 |
|
---|
1849 | From F<d_getsent.U>:
|
---|
1850 |
|
---|
1851 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETSERVENT> if getservent() is
|
---|
1852 | available to look up network services in some data base or another.
|
---|
1853 |
|
---|
1854 | =item C<d_getservbyname_r>
|
---|
1855 |
|
---|
1856 | From F<d_getservbyname_r.U>:
|
---|
1857 |
|
---|
1858 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYNAME_R> symbol,
|
---|
1859 | which indicates to the C program that the getservbyname_r()
|
---|
1860 | routine is available.
|
---|
1861 |
|
---|
1862 | =item C<d_getservbyport_r>
|
---|
1863 |
|
---|
1864 | From F<d_getservbyport_r.U>:
|
---|
1865 |
|
---|
1866 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYPORT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1867 | which indicates to the C program that the getservbyport_r()
|
---|
1868 | routine is available.
|
---|
1869 |
|
---|
1870 | =item C<d_getservent_r>
|
---|
1871 |
|
---|
1872 | From F<d_getservent_r.U>:
|
---|
1873 |
|
---|
1874 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
1875 | which indicates to the C program that the getservent_r()
|
---|
1876 | routine is available.
|
---|
1877 |
|
---|
1878 | =item C<d_getservprotos>
|
---|
1879 |
|
---|
1880 | From F<d_getservprotos.U>:
|
---|
1881 |
|
---|
1882 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERV_PROTOS> symbol,
|
---|
1883 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies
|
---|
1884 | prototypes for the various getserv*() functions.
|
---|
1885 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types.
|
---|
1886 |
|
---|
1887 | =item C<d_getspnam>
|
---|
1888 |
|
---|
1889 | From F<d_getspnam.U>:
|
---|
1890 |
|
---|
1891 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETSPNAM> if getspnam() is
|
---|
1892 | available to retrieve SysV shadow password entries by name.
|
---|
1893 |
|
---|
1894 | =item C<d_getspnam_r>
|
---|
1895 |
|
---|
1896 | From F<d_getspnam_r.U>:
|
---|
1897 |
|
---|
1898 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSPNAM_R> symbol,
|
---|
1899 | which indicates to the C program that the getspnam_r()
|
---|
1900 | routine is available.
|
---|
1901 |
|
---|
1902 | =item C<d_gettimeod>
|
---|
1903 |
|
---|
1904 | From F<d_ftime.U>:
|
---|
1905 |
|
---|
1906 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETTIMEOFDAY> symbol, which
|
---|
1907 | indicates that the gettimeofday() system call exists (to obtain a
|
---|
1908 | sub-second accuracy clock). You should probably include <sys/resource.h>.
|
---|
1909 |
|
---|
1910 | =item C<d_gmtime_r>
|
---|
1911 |
|
---|
1912 | From F<d_gmtime_r.U>:
|
---|
1913 |
|
---|
1914 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GMTIME_R> symbol,
|
---|
1915 | which indicates to the C program that the gmtime_r()
|
---|
1916 | routine is available.
|
---|
1917 |
|
---|
1918 | =item C<d_gnulibc>
|
---|
1919 |
|
---|
1920 | From F<d_gnulibc.U>:
|
---|
1921 |
|
---|
1922 | Defined if we're dealing with the C<GNU> C Library.
|
---|
1923 |
|
---|
1924 | =item C<d_grpasswd>
|
---|
1925 |
|
---|
1926 | From F<i_grp.U>:
|
---|
1927 |
|
---|
1928 | This variable conditionally defines C<GRPASSWD>, which indicates
|
---|
1929 | that struct group in <grp.h> contains gr_passwd.
|
---|
1930 |
|
---|
1931 | =item C<d_hasmntopt>
|
---|
1932 |
|
---|
1933 | From F<d_hasmntopt.U>:
|
---|
1934 |
|
---|
1935 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_HASMNTOPT> symbol, which
|
---|
1936 | indicates to the C program that the hasmntopt() routine is available
|
---|
1937 | to query the mount options of file systems.
|
---|
1938 |
|
---|
1939 | =item C<d_htonl>
|
---|
1940 |
|
---|
1941 | From F<d_htonl.U>:
|
---|
1942 |
|
---|
1943 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_HTONL> if htonl() and its
|
---|
1944 | friends are available to do network order byte swapping.
|
---|
1945 |
|
---|
1946 | =item C<d_ilogbl>
|
---|
1947 |
|
---|
1948 | From F<d_ilogbl.U>:
|
---|
1949 |
|
---|
1950 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ILOGBL> symbol, which
|
---|
1951 | indicates to the C program that the ilogbl() routine is available.
|
---|
1952 | If scalbnl is also present we can emulate frexpl.
|
---|
1953 |
|
---|
1954 | =item C<d_index>
|
---|
1955 |
|
---|
1956 | From F<d_strchr.U>:
|
---|
1957 |
|
---|
1958 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_INDEX> if index() and
|
---|
1959 | rindex() are available for string searching.
|
---|
1960 |
|
---|
1961 | =item C<d_inetaton>
|
---|
1962 |
|
---|
1963 | From F<d_inetaton.U>:
|
---|
1964 |
|
---|
1965 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_INET_ATON> symbol, which
|
---|
1966 | indicates to the C program that the inet_aton() function is available
|
---|
1967 | to parse C<IP> address C<dotted-quad> strings.
|
---|
1968 |
|
---|
1969 | =item C<d_int64_t>
|
---|
1970 |
|
---|
1971 | From F<d_int64_t.U>:
|
---|
1972 |
|
---|
1973 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports int64_t.
|
---|
1974 |
|
---|
1975 | =item C<d_isascii>
|
---|
1976 |
|
---|
1977 | From F<d_isascii.U>:
|
---|
1978 |
|
---|
1979 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISASCII> constant,
|
---|
1980 | which indicates to the C program that isascii() is available.
|
---|
1981 |
|
---|
1982 | =item C<d_isfinite>
|
---|
1983 |
|
---|
1984 | From F<d_isfinite.U>:
|
---|
1985 |
|
---|
1986 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISFINITE> symbol, which
|
---|
1987 | indicates to the C program that the isfinite() routine is available.
|
---|
1988 |
|
---|
1989 | =item C<d_isinf>
|
---|
1990 |
|
---|
1991 | From F<d_isinf.U>:
|
---|
1992 |
|
---|
1993 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISINF> symbol, which
|
---|
1994 | indicates to the C program that the isinf() routine is available.
|
---|
1995 |
|
---|
1996 | =item C<d_isnan>
|
---|
1997 |
|
---|
1998 | From F<d_isnan.U>:
|
---|
1999 |
|
---|
2000 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISNAN> symbol, which
|
---|
2001 | indicates to the C program that the isnan() routine is available.
|
---|
2002 |
|
---|
2003 | =item C<d_isnanl>
|
---|
2004 |
|
---|
2005 | From F<d_isnanl.U>:
|
---|
2006 |
|
---|
2007 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISNANL> symbol, which
|
---|
2008 | indicates to the C program that the isnanl() routine is available.
|
---|
2009 |
|
---|
2010 | =item C<d_killpg>
|
---|
2011 |
|
---|
2012 | From F<d_killpg.U>:
|
---|
2013 |
|
---|
2014 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_KILLPG> symbol, which
|
---|
2015 | indicates to the C program that the killpg() routine is available
|
---|
2016 | to kill process groups.
|
---|
2017 |
|
---|
2018 | =item C<d_lchown>
|
---|
2019 |
|
---|
2020 | From F<d_lchown.U>:
|
---|
2021 |
|
---|
2022 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LCHOWN> symbol, which
|
---|
2023 | indicates to the C program that the lchown() routine is available
|
---|
2024 | to operate on a symbolic link (instead of following the link).
|
---|
2025 |
|
---|
2026 | =item C<d_ldbl_dig>
|
---|
2027 |
|
---|
2028 | From F<d_ldbl_dig.U>:
|
---|
2029 |
|
---|
2030 | This variable conditionally defines d_ldbl_dig if this system's
|
---|
2031 | header files provide C<LDBL_DIG>, which is the number of significant
|
---|
2032 | digits in a long double precision number.
|
---|
2033 |
|
---|
2034 | =item C<d_link>
|
---|
2035 |
|
---|
2036 | From F<d_link.U>:
|
---|
2037 |
|
---|
2038 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LINK> if link() is
|
---|
2039 | available to create hard links.
|
---|
2040 |
|
---|
2041 | =item C<d_localtime_r>
|
---|
2042 |
|
---|
2043 | From F<d_localtime_r.U>:
|
---|
2044 |
|
---|
2045 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LOCALTIME_R> symbol,
|
---|
2046 | which indicates to the C program that the localtime_r()
|
---|
2047 | routine is available.
|
---|
2048 |
|
---|
2049 | =item C<d_locconv>
|
---|
2050 |
|
---|
2051 | From F<d_locconv.U>:
|
---|
2052 |
|
---|
2053 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LOCALECONV> if localeconv() is
|
---|
2054 | available for numeric and monetary formatting conventions.
|
---|
2055 |
|
---|
2056 | =item C<d_lockf>
|
---|
2057 |
|
---|
2058 | From F<d_lockf.U>:
|
---|
2059 |
|
---|
2060 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LOCKF> if lockf() is
|
---|
2061 | available to do file locking.
|
---|
2062 |
|
---|
2063 | =item C<d_longdbl>
|
---|
2064 |
|
---|
2065 | From F<d_longdbl.U>:
|
---|
2066 |
|
---|
2067 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LONG_DOUBLE> if
|
---|
2068 | the long double type is supported.
|
---|
2069 |
|
---|
2070 | =item C<d_longlong>
|
---|
2071 |
|
---|
2072 | From F<d_longlong.U>:
|
---|
2073 |
|
---|
2074 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LONG_LONG> if
|
---|
2075 | the long long type is supported.
|
---|
2076 |
|
---|
2077 | =item C<d_lseekproto>
|
---|
2078 |
|
---|
2079 | From F<d_lseekproto.U>:
|
---|
2080 |
|
---|
2081 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LSEEK_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
2082 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
2083 | a prototype for the lseek() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
2084 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
2085 |
|
---|
2086 | =item C<d_lstat>
|
---|
2087 |
|
---|
2088 | From F<d_lstat.U>:
|
---|
2089 |
|
---|
2090 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LSTAT> if lstat() is
|
---|
2091 | available to do file stats on symbolic links.
|
---|
2092 |
|
---|
2093 | =item C<d_madvise>
|
---|
2094 |
|
---|
2095 | From F<d_madvise.U>:
|
---|
2096 |
|
---|
2097 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MADVISE> if madvise() is
|
---|
2098 | available to map a file into memory.
|
---|
2099 |
|
---|
2100 | =item C<d_malloc_size>
|
---|
2101 |
|
---|
2102 | From F<d_malloc_size.U>:
|
---|
2103 |
|
---|
2104 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the malloc_size
|
---|
2105 | routine is available for use.
|
---|
2106 |
|
---|
2107 | =item C<d_malloc_good_size>
|
---|
2108 |
|
---|
2109 | From F<d_malloc_good_size.U>:
|
---|
2110 |
|
---|
2111 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the malloc_good_size
|
---|
2112 | routine is available for use.
|
---|
2113 |
|
---|
2114 | =item C<d_mblen>
|
---|
2115 |
|
---|
2116 | From F<d_mblen.U>:
|
---|
2117 |
|
---|
2118 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBLEN> symbol, which
|
---|
2119 | indicates to the C program that the mblen() routine is available
|
---|
2120 | to find the number of bytes in a multibye character.
|
---|
2121 |
|
---|
2122 | =item C<d_mbstowcs>
|
---|
2123 |
|
---|
2124 | From F<d_mbstowcs.U>:
|
---|
2125 |
|
---|
2126 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBSTOWCS> symbol, which
|
---|
2127 | indicates to the C program that the mbstowcs() routine is available
|
---|
2128 | to convert a multibyte string into a wide character string.
|
---|
2129 |
|
---|
2130 | =item C<d_mbtowc>
|
---|
2131 |
|
---|
2132 | From F<d_mbtowc.U>:
|
---|
2133 |
|
---|
2134 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBTOWC> symbol, which
|
---|
2135 | indicates to the C program that the mbtowc() routine is available
|
---|
2136 | to convert multibyte to a wide character.
|
---|
2137 |
|
---|
2138 | =item C<d_memchr>
|
---|
2139 |
|
---|
2140 | From F<d_memchr.U>:
|
---|
2141 |
|
---|
2142 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCHR> symbol, which
|
---|
2143 | indicates to the C program that the memchr() routine is available
|
---|
2144 | to locate characters within a C string.
|
---|
2145 |
|
---|
2146 | =item C<d_memcmp>
|
---|
2147 |
|
---|
2148 | From F<d_memcmp.U>:
|
---|
2149 |
|
---|
2150 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCMP> symbol, which
|
---|
2151 | indicates to the C program that the memcmp() routine is available
|
---|
2152 | to compare blocks of memory.
|
---|
2153 |
|
---|
2154 | =item C<d_memcpy>
|
---|
2155 |
|
---|
2156 | From F<d_memcpy.U>:
|
---|
2157 |
|
---|
2158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCPY> symbol, which
|
---|
2159 | indicates to the C program that the memcpy() routine is available
|
---|
2160 | to copy blocks of memory.
|
---|
2161 |
|
---|
2162 | =item C<d_memmove>
|
---|
2163 |
|
---|
2164 | From F<d_memmove.U>:
|
---|
2165 |
|
---|
2166 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMMOVE> symbol, which
|
---|
2167 | indicates to the C program that the memmove() routine is available
|
---|
2168 | to copy potentatially overlapping blocks of memory.
|
---|
2169 |
|
---|
2170 | =item C<d_memset>
|
---|
2171 |
|
---|
2172 | From F<d_memset.U>:
|
---|
2173 |
|
---|
2174 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMSET> symbol, which
|
---|
2175 | indicates to the C program that the memset() routine is available
|
---|
2176 | to set blocks of memory.
|
---|
2177 |
|
---|
2178 | =item C<d_mkdir>
|
---|
2179 |
|
---|
2180 | From F<d_mkdir.U>:
|
---|
2181 |
|
---|
2182 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKDIR> symbol, which
|
---|
2183 | indicates to the C program that the mkdir() routine is available
|
---|
2184 | to create F<directories.>.
|
---|
2185 |
|
---|
2186 | =item C<d_mkdtemp>
|
---|
2187 |
|
---|
2188 | From F<d_mkdtemp.U>:
|
---|
2189 |
|
---|
2190 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKDTEMP> symbol, which
|
---|
2191 | indicates to the C program that the mkdtemp() routine is available
|
---|
2192 | to exclusively create a uniquely named temporary directory.
|
---|
2193 |
|
---|
2194 | =item C<d_mkfifo>
|
---|
2195 |
|
---|
2196 | From F<d_mkfifo.U>:
|
---|
2197 |
|
---|
2198 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKFIFO> symbol, which
|
---|
2199 | indicates to the C program that the mkfifo() routine is available.
|
---|
2200 |
|
---|
2201 | =item C<d_mkstemp>
|
---|
2202 |
|
---|
2203 | From F<d_mkstemp.U>:
|
---|
2204 |
|
---|
2205 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKSTEMP> symbol, which
|
---|
2206 | indicates to the C program that the mkstemp() routine is available
|
---|
2207 | to exclusively create and open a uniquely named temporary file.
|
---|
2208 |
|
---|
2209 | =item C<d_mkstemps>
|
---|
2210 |
|
---|
2211 | From F<d_mkstemps.U>:
|
---|
2212 |
|
---|
2213 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKSTEMPS> symbol, which
|
---|
2214 | indicates to the C program that the mkstemps() routine is available
|
---|
2215 | to exclusively create and open a uniquely named (with a suffix)
|
---|
2216 | temporary file.
|
---|
2217 |
|
---|
2218 | =item C<d_mktime>
|
---|
2219 |
|
---|
2220 | From F<d_mktime.U>:
|
---|
2221 |
|
---|
2222 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKTIME> symbol, which
|
---|
2223 | indicates to the C program that the mktime() routine is available.
|
---|
2224 |
|
---|
2225 | =item C<d_mmap>
|
---|
2226 |
|
---|
2227 | From F<d_mmap.U>:
|
---|
2228 |
|
---|
2229 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MMAP> if mmap() is
|
---|
2230 | available to map a file into memory.
|
---|
2231 |
|
---|
2232 | =item C<d_modfl>
|
---|
2233 |
|
---|
2234 | From F<d_modfl.U>:
|
---|
2235 |
|
---|
2236 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MODFL> symbol, which
|
---|
2237 | indicates to the C program that the modfl() routine is available.
|
---|
2238 |
|
---|
2239 | =item C<d_modfl_pow32_bug>
|
---|
2240 |
|
---|
2241 | From F<d_modfl.U>:
|
---|
2242 |
|
---|
2243 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_MODFL_POW32_BUG symbol,
|
---|
2244 | which indicates that modfl() is broken for long doubles >= pow(2, 32).
|
---|
2245 | For example from 4294967303.150000 one would get 4294967302.000000
|
---|
2246 | and 1.150000. The bug has been seen in certain versions of glibc,
|
---|
2247 | release 2.2.2 is known to be okay.
|
---|
2248 |
|
---|
2249 | =item C<d_modflproto>
|
---|
2250 |
|
---|
2251 | From F<d_modfl.U>:
|
---|
2252 |
|
---|
2253 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the system provides
|
---|
2254 | a prototype for the modfl() function. Otherwise, it is up
|
---|
2255 | to the program to supply one. C99 says it should be
|
---|
2256 | long double modfl(long double, long double *);
|
---|
2257 |
|
---|
2258 | =item C<d_mprotect>
|
---|
2259 |
|
---|
2260 | From F<d_mprotect.U>:
|
---|
2261 |
|
---|
2262 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MPROTECT> if mprotect() is
|
---|
2263 | available to modify the access protection of a memory mapped file.
|
---|
2264 |
|
---|
2265 | =item C<d_msg>
|
---|
2266 |
|
---|
2267 | From F<d_msg.U>:
|
---|
2268 |
|
---|
2269 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG> symbol, which
|
---|
2270 | indicates that the entire msg*(2) library is present.
|
---|
2271 |
|
---|
2272 | =item C<d_msg_ctrunc>
|
---|
2273 |
|
---|
2274 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
2275 |
|
---|
2276 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_CTRUNC> symbol,
|
---|
2277 | which indicates that the C<MSG_CTRUNC> is available. #ifdef is
|
---|
2278 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this.
|
---|
2279 |
|
---|
2280 | =item C<d_msg_dontroute>
|
---|
2281 |
|
---|
2282 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
2283 |
|
---|
2284 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_DONTROUTE> symbol,
|
---|
2285 | which indicates that the C<MSG_DONTROUTE> is available. #ifdef is
|
---|
2286 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this.
|
---|
2287 |
|
---|
2288 | =item C<d_msg_oob>
|
---|
2289 |
|
---|
2290 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
2291 |
|
---|
2292 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_OOB> symbol,
|
---|
2293 | which indicates that the C<MSG_OOB> is available. #ifdef is
|
---|
2294 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this.
|
---|
2295 |
|
---|
2296 | =item C<d_msg_peek>
|
---|
2297 |
|
---|
2298 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
2299 |
|
---|
2300 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_PEEK> symbol,
|
---|
2301 | which indicates that the C<MSG_PEEK> is available. #ifdef is
|
---|
2302 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this.
|
---|
2303 |
|
---|
2304 | =item C<d_msg_proxy>
|
---|
2305 |
|
---|
2306 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
2307 |
|
---|
2308 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_PROXY> symbol,
|
---|
2309 | which indicates that the C<MSG_PROXY> is available. #ifdef is
|
---|
2310 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this.
|
---|
2311 |
|
---|
2312 | =item C<d_msgctl>
|
---|
2313 |
|
---|
2314 | From F<d_msgctl.U>:
|
---|
2315 |
|
---|
2316 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGCTL> symbol, which
|
---|
2317 | indicates to the C program that the msgctl() routine is available.
|
---|
2318 |
|
---|
2319 | =item C<d_msgget>
|
---|
2320 |
|
---|
2321 | From F<d_msgget.U>:
|
---|
2322 |
|
---|
2323 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGGET> symbol, which
|
---|
2324 | indicates to the C program that the msgget() routine is available.
|
---|
2325 |
|
---|
2326 | =item C<d_msghdr_s>
|
---|
2327 |
|
---|
2328 | From F<d_msghdr_s.U>:
|
---|
2329 |
|
---|
2330 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_MSGHDR> symbol,
|
---|
2331 | which indicates that the struct msghdr is supported.
|
---|
2332 |
|
---|
2333 | =item C<d_msgrcv>
|
---|
2334 |
|
---|
2335 | From F<d_msgrcv.U>:
|
---|
2336 |
|
---|
2337 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGRCV> symbol, which
|
---|
2338 | indicates to the C program that the msgrcv() routine is available.
|
---|
2339 |
|
---|
2340 | =item C<d_msgsnd>
|
---|
2341 |
|
---|
2342 | From F<d_msgsnd.U>:
|
---|
2343 |
|
---|
2344 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGSND> symbol, which
|
---|
2345 | indicates to the C program that the msgsnd() routine is available.
|
---|
2346 |
|
---|
2347 | =item C<d_msync>
|
---|
2348 |
|
---|
2349 | From F<d_msync.U>:
|
---|
2350 |
|
---|
2351 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MSYNC> if msync() is
|
---|
2352 | available to synchronize a mapped file.
|
---|
2353 |
|
---|
2354 | =item C<d_munmap>
|
---|
2355 |
|
---|
2356 | From F<d_munmap.U>:
|
---|
2357 |
|
---|
2358 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MUNMAP> if munmap() is
|
---|
2359 | available to unmap a region mapped by mmap().
|
---|
2360 |
|
---|
2361 | =item C<d_mymalloc>
|
---|
2362 |
|
---|
2363 | From F<mallocsrc.U>:
|
---|
2364 |
|
---|
2365 | This variable conditionally defines C<MYMALLOC> in case other parts
|
---|
2366 | of the source want to take special action if C<MYMALLOC> is used.
|
---|
2367 | This may include different sorts of profiling or error detection.
|
---|
2368 |
|
---|
2369 | =item C<d_nanosleep>
|
---|
2370 |
|
---|
2371 | From F<d_nanosleep.U>:
|
---|
2372 |
|
---|
2373 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_NANOSLEEP>
|
---|
2374 | if nanosleep() is available to sleep with 1E-9 sec accuracy.
|
---|
2375 |
|
---|
2376 | =item C<d_nice>
|
---|
2377 |
|
---|
2378 | From F<d_nice.U>:
|
---|
2379 |
|
---|
2380 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_NICE> symbol, which
|
---|
2381 | indicates to the C program that the nice() routine is available.
|
---|
2382 |
|
---|
2383 | =item C<d_nl_langinfo>
|
---|
2384 |
|
---|
2385 | From F<d_nl_langinfo.U>:
|
---|
2386 |
|
---|
2387 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_NL_LANGINFO> symbol, which
|
---|
2388 | indicates to the C program that the nl_langinfo() routine is available.
|
---|
2389 |
|
---|
2390 | =item C<d_nv_preserves_uv>
|
---|
2391 |
|
---|
2392 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
2393 |
|
---|
2394 | This variable indicates whether a variable of type nvtype
|
---|
2395 | can preserve all the bits a variable of type uvtype.
|
---|
2396 |
|
---|
2397 | =item C<d_nv_zero_is_allbits_zero>
|
---|
2398 |
|
---|
2399 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
2400 |
|
---|
2401 | This variable indicates whether a variable of type nvtype
|
---|
2402 | stores 0.0 in memory as all bits zero.
|
---|
2403 |
|
---|
2404 | =item C<d_off64_t>
|
---|
2405 |
|
---|
2406 | From F<d_off64_t.U>:
|
---|
2407 |
|
---|
2408 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports off64_t.
|
---|
2409 |
|
---|
2410 | =item C<d_old_pthread_create_joinable>
|
---|
2411 |
|
---|
2412 | From F<d_pthrattrj.U>:
|
---|
2413 |
|
---|
2414 | This variable conditionally defines pthread_create_joinable.
|
---|
2415 | undef if F<pthread.h> defines C<PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE>.
|
---|
2416 |
|
---|
2417 | =item C<d_oldpthreads>
|
---|
2418 |
|
---|
2419 | From F<usethreads.U>:
|
---|
2420 |
|
---|
2421 | This variable conditionally defines the C<OLD_PTHREADS_API> symbol,
|
---|
2422 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the old
|
---|
2423 | draft C<POSIX> threads C<API>. This is only potentially meaningful if
|
---|
2424 | usethreads is set.
|
---|
2425 |
|
---|
2426 | =item C<d_oldsock>
|
---|
2427 |
|
---|
2428 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
2429 |
|
---|
2430 | This variable conditionally defines the C<OLDSOCKET> symbol, which
|
---|
2431 | indicates that the C<BSD> socket interface is based on 4.1c and not 4.2.
|
---|
2432 |
|
---|
2433 | =item C<d_open3>
|
---|
2434 |
|
---|
2435 | From F<d_open3.U>:
|
---|
2436 |
|
---|
2437 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_OPEN3 manifest constant,
|
---|
2438 | which indicates to the C program that the 3 argument version of
|
---|
2439 | the open(2) function is available.
|
---|
2440 |
|
---|
2441 | =item C<d_pathconf>
|
---|
2442 |
|
---|
2443 | From F<d_pathconf.U>:
|
---|
2444 |
|
---|
2445 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PATHCONF> symbol, which
|
---|
2446 | indicates to the C program that the pathconf() routine is available
|
---|
2447 | to determine file-system related limits and options associated
|
---|
2448 | with a given filename.
|
---|
2449 |
|
---|
2450 | =item C<d_pause>
|
---|
2451 |
|
---|
2452 | From F<d_pause.U>:
|
---|
2453 |
|
---|
2454 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PAUSE> symbol, which
|
---|
2455 | indicates to the C program that the pause() routine is available
|
---|
2456 | to suspend a process until a signal is received.
|
---|
2457 |
|
---|
2458 | =item C<d_perl_otherlibdirs>
|
---|
2459 |
|
---|
2460 | From F<otherlibdirs.U>:
|
---|
2461 |
|
---|
2462 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_OTHERLIBDIRS>, which
|
---|
2463 | contains a colon-separated set of paths for the perl binary to
|
---|
2464 | include in @C<INC>. See also otherlibdirs.
|
---|
2465 |
|
---|
2466 | =item C<d_phostname>
|
---|
2467 |
|
---|
2468 | From F<d_gethname.U>:
|
---|
2469 |
|
---|
2470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PHOSTNAME> symbol, which
|
---|
2471 | contains the shell command which, when fed to popen(), may be
|
---|
2472 | used to derive the host name.
|
---|
2473 |
|
---|
2474 | =item C<d_pipe>
|
---|
2475 |
|
---|
2476 | From F<d_pipe.U>:
|
---|
2477 |
|
---|
2478 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PIPE> symbol, which
|
---|
2479 | indicates to the C program that the pipe() routine is available
|
---|
2480 | to create an inter-process channel.
|
---|
2481 |
|
---|
2482 | =item C<d_poll>
|
---|
2483 |
|
---|
2484 | From F<d_poll.U>:
|
---|
2485 |
|
---|
2486 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_POLL> symbol, which
|
---|
2487 | indicates to the C program that the poll() routine is available
|
---|
2488 | to poll active file descriptors.
|
---|
2489 |
|
---|
2490 | =item C<d_portable>
|
---|
2491 |
|
---|
2492 | From F<d_portable.U>:
|
---|
2493 |
|
---|
2494 | This variable conditionally defines the C<PORTABLE> symbol, which
|
---|
2495 | indicates to the C program that it should not assume that it is
|
---|
2496 | running on the machine it was compiled on.
|
---|
2497 |
|
---|
2498 | =item C<d_PRId64>
|
---|
2499 |
|
---|
2500 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
2501 |
|
---|
2502 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRId64 symbol, which
|
---|
2503 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit decimal numbers.
|
---|
2504 |
|
---|
2505 | =item C<d_PRIeldbl>
|
---|
2506 |
|
---|
2507 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
2508 |
|
---|
2509 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which
|
---|
2510 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles.
|
---|
2511 |
|
---|
2512 | =item C<d_PRIEUldbl>
|
---|
2513 |
|
---|
2514 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
2515 |
|
---|
2516 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which
|
---|
2517 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles.
|
---|
2518 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIeldbl so that even
|
---|
2519 | case-blind systems can see the difference.
|
---|
2520 |
|
---|
2521 | =item C<d_PRIfldbl>
|
---|
2522 |
|
---|
2523 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
2524 |
|
---|
2525 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which
|
---|
2526 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles.
|
---|
2527 |
|
---|
2528 | =item C<d_PRIFUldbl>
|
---|
2529 |
|
---|
2530 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
2531 |
|
---|
2532 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which
|
---|
2533 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles.
|
---|
2534 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIfldbl so that even
|
---|
2535 | case-blind systems can see the difference.
|
---|
2536 |
|
---|
2537 | =item C<d_PRIgldbl>
|
---|
2538 |
|
---|
2539 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
2540 |
|
---|
2541 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which
|
---|
2542 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles.
|
---|
2543 |
|
---|
2544 | =item C<d_PRIGUldbl>
|
---|
2545 |
|
---|
2546 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
2547 |
|
---|
2548 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which
|
---|
2549 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles.
|
---|
2550 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIgldbl so that even
|
---|
2551 | case-blind systems can see the difference.
|
---|
2552 |
|
---|
2553 | =item C<d_PRIi64>
|
---|
2554 |
|
---|
2555 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
2556 |
|
---|
2557 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIi64 symbol, which
|
---|
2558 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit decimal numbers.
|
---|
2559 |
|
---|
2560 | =item C<d_PRIo64>
|
---|
2561 |
|
---|
2562 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
2563 |
|
---|
2564 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIo64 symbol, which
|
---|
2565 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit octal numbers.
|
---|
2566 |
|
---|
2567 | =item C<d_PRIu64>
|
---|
2568 |
|
---|
2569 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
2570 |
|
---|
2571 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIu64 symbol, which
|
---|
2572 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit unsigned decimal
|
---|
2573 | numbers.
|
---|
2574 |
|
---|
2575 | =item C<d_PRIx64>
|
---|
2576 |
|
---|
2577 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
2578 |
|
---|
2579 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIx64 symbol, which
|
---|
2580 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit hexadecimal numbers.
|
---|
2581 |
|
---|
2582 | =item C<d_PRIXU64>
|
---|
2583 |
|
---|
2584 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
2585 |
|
---|
2586 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIXU64 symbol, which
|
---|
2587 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit hExADECimAl numbers.
|
---|
2588 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIx64 so that even
|
---|
2589 | case-blind systems can see the difference.
|
---|
2590 |
|
---|
2591 | =item C<d_procselfexe>
|
---|
2592 |
|
---|
2593 | From F<d_procselfexe.U>:
|
---|
2594 |
|
---|
2595 | Defined if $procselfexe is symlink to the absolute
|
---|
2596 | pathname of the executing program.
|
---|
2597 |
|
---|
2598 | =item C<d_pthread_atfork>
|
---|
2599 |
|
---|
2600 | From F<d_pthread_atfork.U>:
|
---|
2601 |
|
---|
2602 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PTHREAD_ATFORK> symbol,
|
---|
2603 | which indicates to the C program that the pthread_atfork()
|
---|
2604 | routine is available.
|
---|
2605 |
|
---|
2606 | =item C<d_pthread_attr_setscope>
|
---|
2607 |
|
---|
2608 | From F<d_pthread_attr_ss.U>:
|
---|
2609 |
|
---|
2610 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSCOPE> if
|
---|
2611 | pthread_attr_setscope() is available to set the contention scope
|
---|
2612 | attribute of a thread attribute object.
|
---|
2613 |
|
---|
2614 | =item C<d_pthread_yield>
|
---|
2615 |
|
---|
2616 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>:
|
---|
2617 |
|
---|
2618 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PTHREAD_YIELD>
|
---|
2619 | symbol if the pthread_yield routine is available to yield
|
---|
2620 | the execution of the current thread.
|
---|
2621 |
|
---|
2622 | =item C<d_pwage>
|
---|
2623 |
|
---|
2624 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
2625 |
|
---|
2626 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWAGE>, which indicates
|
---|
2627 | that struct passwd contains pw_age.
|
---|
2628 |
|
---|
2629 | =item C<d_pwchange>
|
---|
2630 |
|
---|
2631 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
2632 |
|
---|
2633 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCHANGE>, which indicates
|
---|
2634 | that struct passwd contains pw_change.
|
---|
2635 |
|
---|
2636 | =item C<d_pwclass>
|
---|
2637 |
|
---|
2638 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
2639 |
|
---|
2640 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCLASS>, which indicates
|
---|
2641 | that struct passwd contains pw_class.
|
---|
2642 |
|
---|
2643 | =item C<d_pwcomment>
|
---|
2644 |
|
---|
2645 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
2646 |
|
---|
2647 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCOMMENT>, which indicates
|
---|
2648 | that struct passwd contains pw_comment.
|
---|
2649 |
|
---|
2650 | =item C<d_pwexpire>
|
---|
2651 |
|
---|
2652 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
2653 |
|
---|
2654 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWEXPIRE>, which indicates
|
---|
2655 | that struct passwd contains pw_expire.
|
---|
2656 |
|
---|
2657 | =item C<d_pwgecos>
|
---|
2658 |
|
---|
2659 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
2660 |
|
---|
2661 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWGECOS>, which indicates
|
---|
2662 | that struct passwd contains pw_gecos.
|
---|
2663 |
|
---|
2664 | =item C<d_pwpasswd>
|
---|
2665 |
|
---|
2666 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
2667 |
|
---|
2668 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWPASSWD>, which indicates
|
---|
2669 | that struct passwd contains pw_passwd.
|
---|
2670 |
|
---|
2671 | =item C<d_pwquota>
|
---|
2672 |
|
---|
2673 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
2674 |
|
---|
2675 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWQUOTA>, which indicates
|
---|
2676 | that struct passwd contains pw_quota.
|
---|
2677 |
|
---|
2678 | =item C<d_qgcvt>
|
---|
2679 |
|
---|
2680 | From F<d_qgcvt.U>:
|
---|
2681 |
|
---|
2682 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_QGCVT> symbol, which
|
---|
2683 | indicates to the C program that the qgcvt() routine is available.
|
---|
2684 |
|
---|
2685 | =item C<d_quad>
|
---|
2686 |
|
---|
2687 | From F<quadtype.U>:
|
---|
2688 |
|
---|
2689 | This variable, if defined, tells that there's a 64-bit integer type,
|
---|
2690 | quadtype.
|
---|
2691 |
|
---|
2692 | =item C<d_random_r>
|
---|
2693 |
|
---|
2694 | From F<d_random_r.U>:
|
---|
2695 |
|
---|
2696 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RANDOM_R> symbol,
|
---|
2697 | which indicates to the C program that the random_r()
|
---|
2698 | routine is available.
|
---|
2699 |
|
---|
2700 | =item C<d_readdir64_r>
|
---|
2701 |
|
---|
2702 | From F<d_readdir64_r.U>:
|
---|
2703 |
|
---|
2704 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_READDIR64_R symbol,
|
---|
2705 | which indicates to the C program that the readdir64_r()
|
---|
2706 | routine is available.
|
---|
2707 |
|
---|
2708 | =item C<d_readdir>
|
---|
2709 |
|
---|
2710 | From F<d_readdir.U>:
|
---|
2711 |
|
---|
2712 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_READDIR> if readdir() is
|
---|
2713 | available to read directory entries.
|
---|
2714 |
|
---|
2715 | =item C<d_readdir_r>
|
---|
2716 |
|
---|
2717 | From F<d_readdir_r.U>:
|
---|
2718 |
|
---|
2719 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READDIR_R> symbol,
|
---|
2720 | which indicates to the C program that the readdir_r()
|
---|
2721 | routine is available.
|
---|
2722 |
|
---|
2723 | =item C<d_readlink>
|
---|
2724 |
|
---|
2725 | From F<d_readlink.U>:
|
---|
2726 |
|
---|
2727 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READLINK> symbol, which
|
---|
2728 | indicates to the C program that the readlink() routine is available
|
---|
2729 | to read the value of a symbolic link.
|
---|
2730 |
|
---|
2731 | =item C<d_readv>
|
---|
2732 |
|
---|
2733 | From F<d_readv.U>:
|
---|
2734 |
|
---|
2735 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READV> symbol, which
|
---|
2736 | indicates to the C program that the readv() routine is available.
|
---|
2737 |
|
---|
2738 | =item C<d_recvmsg>
|
---|
2739 |
|
---|
2740 | From F<d_recvmsg.U>:
|
---|
2741 |
|
---|
2742 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RECVMSG> symbol, which
|
---|
2743 | indicates to the C program that the recvmsg() routine is available.
|
---|
2744 |
|
---|
2745 | =item C<d_rename>
|
---|
2746 |
|
---|
2747 | From F<d_rename.U>:
|
---|
2748 |
|
---|
2749 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RENAME> symbol, which
|
---|
2750 | indicates to the C program that the rename() routine is available
|
---|
2751 | to rename files.
|
---|
2752 |
|
---|
2753 | =item C<d_rewinddir>
|
---|
2754 |
|
---|
2755 | From F<d_readdir.U>:
|
---|
2756 |
|
---|
2757 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_REWINDDIR> if rewinddir() is
|
---|
2758 | available.
|
---|
2759 |
|
---|
2760 | =item C<d_rmdir>
|
---|
2761 |
|
---|
2762 | From F<d_rmdir.U>:
|
---|
2763 |
|
---|
2764 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_RMDIR> if rmdir() is
|
---|
2765 | available to remove directories.
|
---|
2766 |
|
---|
2767 | =item C<d_safebcpy>
|
---|
2768 |
|
---|
2769 | From F<d_safebcpy.U>:
|
---|
2770 |
|
---|
2771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SAFE_BCOPY> symbol if
|
---|
2772 | the bcopy() routine can do overlapping copies. Normally, you
|
---|
2773 | should probably use memmove().
|
---|
2774 |
|
---|
2775 | =item C<d_safemcpy>
|
---|
2776 |
|
---|
2777 | From F<d_safemcpy.U>:
|
---|
2778 |
|
---|
2779 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SAFE_MEMCPY> symbol if
|
---|
2780 | the memcpy() routine can do overlapping copies.
|
---|
2781 | For overlapping copies, memmove() should be used, if available.
|
---|
2782 |
|
---|
2783 | =item C<d_sanemcmp>
|
---|
2784 |
|
---|
2785 | From F<d_sanemcmp.U>:
|
---|
2786 |
|
---|
2787 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SANE_MEMCMP> symbol if
|
---|
2788 | the memcpy() routine is available and can be used to compare relative
|
---|
2789 | magnitudes of chars with their high bits set.
|
---|
2790 |
|
---|
2791 | =item C<d_sbrkproto>
|
---|
2792 |
|
---|
2793 | From F<d_sbrkproto.U>:
|
---|
2794 |
|
---|
2795 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SBRK_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
2796 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
2797 | a prototype for the sbrk() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
2798 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
2799 |
|
---|
2800 | =item C<d_scalbnl>
|
---|
2801 |
|
---|
2802 | From F<d_scalbnl.U>:
|
---|
2803 |
|
---|
2804 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCALBNL> symbol, which
|
---|
2805 | indicates to the C program that the scalbnl() routine is available.
|
---|
2806 | If ilogbl is also present we can emulate frexpl.
|
---|
2807 |
|
---|
2808 | =item C<d_sched_yield>
|
---|
2809 |
|
---|
2810 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>:
|
---|
2811 |
|
---|
2812 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCHED_YIELD>
|
---|
2813 | symbol if the sched_yield routine is available to yield
|
---|
2814 | the execution of the current thread.
|
---|
2815 |
|
---|
2816 | =item C<d_scm_rights>
|
---|
2817 |
|
---|
2818 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
2819 |
|
---|
2820 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCM_RIGHTS> symbol,
|
---|
2821 | which indicates that the C<SCM_RIGHTS> is available. #ifdef is
|
---|
2822 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this.
|
---|
2823 |
|
---|
2824 | =item C<d_SCNfldbl>
|
---|
2825 |
|
---|
2826 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
2827 |
|
---|
2828 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which
|
---|
2829 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to scan long doubles.
|
---|
2830 |
|
---|
2831 | =item C<d_seekdir>
|
---|
2832 |
|
---|
2833 | From F<d_readdir.U>:
|
---|
2834 |
|
---|
2835 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SEEKDIR> if seekdir() is
|
---|
2836 | available.
|
---|
2837 |
|
---|
2838 | =item C<d_select>
|
---|
2839 |
|
---|
2840 | From F<d_select.U>:
|
---|
2841 |
|
---|
2842 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SELECT> if select() is
|
---|
2843 | available to select active file descriptors. A <sys/time.h>
|
---|
2844 | inclusion may be necessary for the timeout field.
|
---|
2845 |
|
---|
2846 | =item C<d_sem>
|
---|
2847 |
|
---|
2848 | From F<d_sem.U>:
|
---|
2849 |
|
---|
2850 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEM> symbol, which
|
---|
2851 | indicates that the entire sem*(2) library is present.
|
---|
2852 |
|
---|
2853 | =item C<d_semctl>
|
---|
2854 |
|
---|
2855 | From F<d_semctl.U>:
|
---|
2856 |
|
---|
2857 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMCTL> symbol, which
|
---|
2858 | indicates to the C program that the semctl() routine is available.
|
---|
2859 |
|
---|
2860 | =item C<d_semctl_semid_ds>
|
---|
2861 |
|
---|
2862 | From F<d_union_semun.U>:
|
---|
2863 |
|
---|
2864 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_SEMCTL_SEMID_DS>, which
|
---|
2865 | indicates that struct semid_ds * is to be used for semctl C<IPC_STAT>.
|
---|
2866 |
|
---|
2867 | =item C<d_semctl_semun>
|
---|
2868 |
|
---|
2869 | From F<d_union_semun.U>:
|
---|
2870 |
|
---|
2871 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_SEMCTL_SEMUN>, which
|
---|
2872 | indicates that union semun is to be used for semctl C<IPC_STAT>.
|
---|
2873 |
|
---|
2874 | =item C<d_semget>
|
---|
2875 |
|
---|
2876 | From F<d_semget.U>:
|
---|
2877 |
|
---|
2878 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMGET> symbol, which
|
---|
2879 | indicates to the C program that the semget() routine is available.
|
---|
2880 |
|
---|
2881 | =item C<d_semop>
|
---|
2882 |
|
---|
2883 | From F<d_semop.U>:
|
---|
2884 |
|
---|
2885 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMOP> symbol, which
|
---|
2886 | indicates to the C program that the semop() routine is available.
|
---|
2887 |
|
---|
2888 | =item C<d_sendmsg>
|
---|
2889 |
|
---|
2890 | From F<d_sendmsg.U>:
|
---|
2891 |
|
---|
2892 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SENDMSG> symbol, which
|
---|
2893 | indicates to the C program that the sendmsg() routine is available.
|
---|
2894 |
|
---|
2895 | =item C<d_setegid>
|
---|
2896 |
|
---|
2897 | From F<d_setegid.U>:
|
---|
2898 |
|
---|
2899 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETEGID> symbol, which
|
---|
2900 | indicates to the C program that the setegid() routine is available
|
---|
2901 | to change the effective gid of the current program.
|
---|
2902 |
|
---|
2903 | =item C<d_seteuid>
|
---|
2904 |
|
---|
2905 | From F<d_seteuid.U>:
|
---|
2906 |
|
---|
2907 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETEUID> symbol, which
|
---|
2908 | indicates to the C program that the seteuid() routine is available
|
---|
2909 | to change the effective uid of the current program.
|
---|
2910 |
|
---|
2911 | =item C<d_setgrent>
|
---|
2912 |
|
---|
2913 | From F<d_setgrent.U>:
|
---|
2914 |
|
---|
2915 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGRENT> symbol, which
|
---|
2916 | indicates to the C program that the setgrent() routine is available
|
---|
2917 | for initializing sequential access to the group database.
|
---|
2918 |
|
---|
2919 | =item C<d_setgrent_r>
|
---|
2920 |
|
---|
2921 | From F<d_setgrent_r.U>:
|
---|
2922 |
|
---|
2923 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGRENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
2924 | which indicates to the C program that the setgrent_r()
|
---|
2925 | routine is available.
|
---|
2926 |
|
---|
2927 | =item C<d_setgrps>
|
---|
2928 |
|
---|
2929 | From F<d_setgrps.U>:
|
---|
2930 |
|
---|
2931 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGROUPS> symbol, which
|
---|
2932 | indicates to the C program that the setgroups() routine is available
|
---|
2933 | to set the list of process groups.
|
---|
2934 |
|
---|
2935 | =item C<d_sethent>
|
---|
2936 |
|
---|
2937 | From F<d_sethent.U>:
|
---|
2938 |
|
---|
2939 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETHOSTENT> if sethostent() is
|
---|
2940 | available.
|
---|
2941 |
|
---|
2942 | =item C<d_sethostent_r>
|
---|
2943 |
|
---|
2944 | From F<d_sethostent_r.U>:
|
---|
2945 |
|
---|
2946 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETHOSTENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
2947 | which indicates to the C program that the sethostent_r()
|
---|
2948 | routine is available.
|
---|
2949 |
|
---|
2950 | =item C<d_setitimer>
|
---|
2951 |
|
---|
2952 | From F<d_setitimer.U>:
|
---|
2953 |
|
---|
2954 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETITIMER> symbol, which
|
---|
2955 | indicates to the C program that the setitimer() routine is available.
|
---|
2956 |
|
---|
2957 | =item C<d_setlinebuf>
|
---|
2958 |
|
---|
2959 | From F<d_setlnbuf.U>:
|
---|
2960 |
|
---|
2961 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETLINEBUF> symbol, which
|
---|
2962 | indicates to the C program that the setlinebuf() routine is available
|
---|
2963 | to change stderr or stdout from block-buffered or unbuffered to a
|
---|
2964 | line-buffered mode.
|
---|
2965 |
|
---|
2966 | =item C<d_setlocale>
|
---|
2967 |
|
---|
2968 | From F<d_setlocale.U>:
|
---|
2969 |
|
---|
2970 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETLOCALE> if setlocale() is
|
---|
2971 | available to handle locale-specific ctype implementations.
|
---|
2972 |
|
---|
2973 | =item C<d_setlocale_r>
|
---|
2974 |
|
---|
2975 | From F<d_setlocale_r.U>:
|
---|
2976 |
|
---|
2977 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETLOCALE_R> symbol,
|
---|
2978 | which indicates to the C program that the setlocale_r()
|
---|
2979 | routine is available.
|
---|
2980 |
|
---|
2981 | =item C<d_setnent>
|
---|
2982 |
|
---|
2983 | From F<d_setnent.U>:
|
---|
2984 |
|
---|
2985 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETNETENT> if setnetent() is
|
---|
2986 | available.
|
---|
2987 |
|
---|
2988 | =item C<d_setnetent_r>
|
---|
2989 |
|
---|
2990 | From F<d_setnetent_r.U>:
|
---|
2991 |
|
---|
2992 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETNETENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
2993 | which indicates to the C program that the setnetent_r()
|
---|
2994 | routine is available.
|
---|
2995 |
|
---|
2996 | =item C<d_setpent>
|
---|
2997 |
|
---|
2998 | From F<d_setpent.U>:
|
---|
2999 |
|
---|
3000 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPROTOENT> if setprotoent() is
|
---|
3001 | available.
|
---|
3002 |
|
---|
3003 | =item C<d_setpgid>
|
---|
3004 |
|
---|
3005 | From F<d_setpgid.U>:
|
---|
3006 |
|
---|
3007 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPGID> symbol if the
|
---|
3008 | setpgid(pid, gpid) function is available to set process group C<ID>.
|
---|
3009 |
|
---|
3010 | =item C<d_setpgrp2>
|
---|
3011 |
|
---|
3012 | From F<d_setpgrp2.U>:
|
---|
3013 |
|
---|
3014 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SETPGRP2 symbol, which
|
---|
3015 | indicates to the C program that the setpgrp2() (as in F<DG/C<UX>>) routine
|
---|
3016 | is available to set the current process group.
|
---|
3017 |
|
---|
3018 | =item C<d_setpgrp>
|
---|
3019 |
|
---|
3020 | From F<d_setpgrp.U>:
|
---|
3021 |
|
---|
3022 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPGRP> if setpgrp() is
|
---|
3023 | available to set the current process group.
|
---|
3024 |
|
---|
3025 | =item C<d_setprior>
|
---|
3026 |
|
---|
3027 | From F<d_setprior.U>:
|
---|
3028 |
|
---|
3029 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPRIORITY> if setpriority()
|
---|
3030 | is available to set a process's priority.
|
---|
3031 |
|
---|
3032 | =item C<d_setproctitle>
|
---|
3033 |
|
---|
3034 | From F<d_setproctitle.U>:
|
---|
3035 |
|
---|
3036 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPROCTITLE> symbol,
|
---|
3037 | which indicates to the C program that the setproctitle() routine
|
---|
3038 | is available.
|
---|
3039 |
|
---|
3040 | =item C<d_setprotoent_r>
|
---|
3041 |
|
---|
3042 | From F<d_setprotoent_r.U>:
|
---|
3043 |
|
---|
3044 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPROTOENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
3045 | which indicates to the C program that the setprotoent_r()
|
---|
3046 | routine is available.
|
---|
3047 |
|
---|
3048 | =item C<d_setpwent>
|
---|
3049 |
|
---|
3050 | From F<d_setpwent.U>:
|
---|
3051 |
|
---|
3052 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPWENT> symbol, which
|
---|
3053 | indicates to the C program that the setpwent() routine is available
|
---|
3054 | for initializing sequential access to the passwd database.
|
---|
3055 |
|
---|
3056 | =item C<d_setpwent_r>
|
---|
3057 |
|
---|
3058 | From F<d_setpwent_r.U>:
|
---|
3059 |
|
---|
3060 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPWENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
3061 | which indicates to the C program that the setpwent_r()
|
---|
3062 | routine is available.
|
---|
3063 |
|
---|
3064 | =item C<d_setregid>
|
---|
3065 |
|
---|
3066 | From F<d_setregid.U>:
|
---|
3067 |
|
---|
3068 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREGID> if setregid() is
|
---|
3069 | available to change the real and effective gid of the current
|
---|
3070 | process.
|
---|
3071 |
|
---|
3072 | =item C<d_setresgid>
|
---|
3073 |
|
---|
3074 | From F<d_setregid.U>:
|
---|
3075 |
|
---|
3076 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETRESGID> if setresgid() is
|
---|
3077 | available to change the real, effective and saved gid of the current
|
---|
3078 | process.
|
---|
3079 |
|
---|
3080 | =item C<d_setresuid>
|
---|
3081 |
|
---|
3082 | From F<d_setreuid.U>:
|
---|
3083 |
|
---|
3084 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREUID> if setresuid() is
|
---|
3085 | available to change the real, effective and saved uid of the current
|
---|
3086 | process.
|
---|
3087 |
|
---|
3088 | =item C<d_setreuid>
|
---|
3089 |
|
---|
3090 | From F<d_setreuid.U>:
|
---|
3091 |
|
---|
3092 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREUID> if setreuid() is
|
---|
3093 | available to change the real and effective uid of the current
|
---|
3094 | process.
|
---|
3095 |
|
---|
3096 | =item C<d_setrgid>
|
---|
3097 |
|
---|
3098 | From F<d_setrgid.U>:
|
---|
3099 |
|
---|
3100 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRGID> symbol, which
|
---|
3101 | indicates to the C program that the setrgid() routine is available
|
---|
3102 | to change the real gid of the current program.
|
---|
3103 |
|
---|
3104 | =item C<d_setruid>
|
---|
3105 |
|
---|
3106 | From F<d_setruid.U>:
|
---|
3107 |
|
---|
3108 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRUID> symbol, which
|
---|
3109 | indicates to the C program that the setruid() routine is available
|
---|
3110 | to change the real uid of the current program.
|
---|
3111 |
|
---|
3112 | =item C<d_setsent>
|
---|
3113 |
|
---|
3114 | From F<d_setsent.U>:
|
---|
3115 |
|
---|
3116 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETSERVENT> if setservent() is
|
---|
3117 | available.
|
---|
3118 |
|
---|
3119 | =item C<d_setservent_r>
|
---|
3120 |
|
---|
3121 | From F<d_setservent_r.U>:
|
---|
3122 |
|
---|
3123 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETSERVENT_R> symbol,
|
---|
3124 | which indicates to the C program that the setservent_r()
|
---|
3125 | routine is available.
|
---|
3126 |
|
---|
3127 | =item C<d_setsid>
|
---|
3128 |
|
---|
3129 | From F<d_setsid.U>:
|
---|
3130 |
|
---|
3131 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETSID> if setsid() is
|
---|
3132 | available to set the process group C<ID>.
|
---|
3133 |
|
---|
3134 | =item C<d_setvbuf>
|
---|
3135 |
|
---|
3136 | From F<d_setvbuf.U>:
|
---|
3137 |
|
---|
3138 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETVBUF> symbol, which
|
---|
3139 | indicates to the C program that the setvbuf() routine is available
|
---|
3140 | to change buffering on an open stdio stream.
|
---|
3141 |
|
---|
3142 | =item C<d_sfio>
|
---|
3143 |
|
---|
3144 | From F<d_sfio.U>:
|
---|
3145 |
|
---|
3146 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_SFIO> symbol,
|
---|
3147 | and indicates whether sfio is available (and should be used).
|
---|
3148 |
|
---|
3149 | =item C<d_shm>
|
---|
3150 |
|
---|
3151 | From F<d_shm.U>:
|
---|
3152 |
|
---|
3153 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHM> symbol, which
|
---|
3154 | indicates that the entire shm*(2) library is present.
|
---|
3155 |
|
---|
3156 | =item C<d_shmat>
|
---|
3157 |
|
---|
3158 | From F<d_shmat.U>:
|
---|
3159 |
|
---|
3160 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMAT> symbol, which
|
---|
3161 | indicates to the C program that the shmat() routine is available.
|
---|
3162 |
|
---|
3163 | =item C<d_shmatprototype>
|
---|
3164 |
|
---|
3165 | From F<d_shmat.U>:
|
---|
3166 |
|
---|
3167 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMAT_PROTOTYPE>
|
---|
3168 | symbol, which indicates that F<sys/shm.h> has a prototype for
|
---|
3169 | shmat.
|
---|
3170 |
|
---|
3171 | =item C<d_shmctl>
|
---|
3172 |
|
---|
3173 | From F<d_shmctl.U>:
|
---|
3174 |
|
---|
3175 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMCTL> symbol, which
|
---|
3176 | indicates to the C program that the shmctl() routine is available.
|
---|
3177 |
|
---|
3178 | =item C<d_shmdt>
|
---|
3179 |
|
---|
3180 | From F<d_shmdt.U>:
|
---|
3181 |
|
---|
3182 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMDT> symbol, which
|
---|
3183 | indicates to the C program that the shmdt() routine is available.
|
---|
3184 |
|
---|
3185 | =item C<d_shmget>
|
---|
3186 |
|
---|
3187 | From F<d_shmget.U>:
|
---|
3188 |
|
---|
3189 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMGET> symbol, which
|
---|
3190 | indicates to the C program that the shmget() routine is available.
|
---|
3191 |
|
---|
3192 | =item C<d_sigaction>
|
---|
3193 |
|
---|
3194 | From F<d_sigaction.U>:
|
---|
3195 |
|
---|
3196 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SIGACTION> symbol, which
|
---|
3197 | indicates that the Vr4 sigaction() routine is available.
|
---|
3198 |
|
---|
3199 | =item C<d_sigprocmask>
|
---|
3200 |
|
---|
3201 | From F<d_sigprocmask.U>:
|
---|
3202 |
|
---|
3203 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SIGPROCMASK>
|
---|
3204 | if sigprocmask() is available to examine or change the signal mask
|
---|
3205 | of the calling process.
|
---|
3206 |
|
---|
3207 | =item C<d_sigsetjmp>
|
---|
3208 |
|
---|
3209 | From F<d_sigsetjmp.U>:
|
---|
3210 |
|
---|
3211 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SIGSETJMP> symbol,
|
---|
3212 | which indicates that the sigsetjmp() routine is available to
|
---|
3213 | call setjmp() and optionally save the process's signal mask.
|
---|
3214 |
|
---|
3215 | =item C<d_sockatmark>
|
---|
3216 |
|
---|
3217 | From F<d_sockatmark.U>:
|
---|
3218 |
|
---|
3219 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKATMARK> symbol, which
|
---|
3220 | indicates to the C program that the sockatmark() routine is available.
|
---|
3221 |
|
---|
3222 | =item C<d_sockatmarkproto>
|
---|
3223 |
|
---|
3224 | From F<d_sockatmarkproto.U>:
|
---|
3225 |
|
---|
3226 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKATMARK_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
3227 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
3228 | a prototype for the sockatmark() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
3229 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
3230 |
|
---|
3231 | =item C<d_socket>
|
---|
3232 |
|
---|
3233 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
3234 |
|
---|
3235 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SOCKET>, which indicates
|
---|
3236 | that the C<BSD> socket interface is supported.
|
---|
3237 |
|
---|
3238 | =item C<d_socklen_t>
|
---|
3239 |
|
---|
3240 | From F<d_socklen_t.U>:
|
---|
3241 |
|
---|
3242 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports socklen_t.
|
---|
3243 |
|
---|
3244 | =item C<d_sockpair>
|
---|
3245 |
|
---|
3246 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
3247 |
|
---|
3248 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKETPAIR> symbol, which
|
---|
3249 | indicates that the C<BSD> socketpair() is supported.
|
---|
3250 |
|
---|
3251 | =item C<d_socks5_init>
|
---|
3252 |
|
---|
3253 | From F<d_socks5_init.U>:
|
---|
3254 |
|
---|
3255 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SOCKS5_INIT symbol, which
|
---|
3256 | indicates to the C program that the socks5_init() routine is available.
|
---|
3257 |
|
---|
3258 | =item C<d_sprintf_returns_strlen>
|
---|
3259 |
|
---|
3260 | From F<d_sprintf_returns_strlen.U>:
|
---|
3261 |
|
---|
3262 | This variable defines whether sprintf returns the length of the string
|
---|
3263 | (as per the C<ANSI> spec). Some C libraries retain compatibility with
|
---|
3264 | pre-C<ANSI> C and return a pointer to the passed in buffer; for these
|
---|
3265 | this variable will be undef.
|
---|
3266 |
|
---|
3267 | =item C<d_sqrtl>
|
---|
3268 |
|
---|
3269 | From F<d_sqrtl.U>:
|
---|
3270 |
|
---|
3271 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SQRTL> symbol, which
|
---|
3272 | indicates to the C program that the sqrtl() routine is available.
|
---|
3273 |
|
---|
3274 | =item C<d_srand48_r>
|
---|
3275 |
|
---|
3276 | From F<d_srand48_r.U>:
|
---|
3277 |
|
---|
3278 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SRAND48_R symbol,
|
---|
3279 | which indicates to the C program that the srand48_r()
|
---|
3280 | routine is available.
|
---|
3281 |
|
---|
3282 | =item C<d_srandom_r>
|
---|
3283 |
|
---|
3284 | From F<d_srandom_r.U>:
|
---|
3285 |
|
---|
3286 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SRANDOM_R> symbol,
|
---|
3287 | which indicates to the C program that the srandom_r()
|
---|
3288 | routine is available.
|
---|
3289 |
|
---|
3290 | =item C<d_sresgproto>
|
---|
3291 |
|
---|
3292 | From F<d_sresgproto.U>:
|
---|
3293 |
|
---|
3294 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRESGID_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
3295 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
3296 | a prototype for the setresgid() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
3297 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
3298 |
|
---|
3299 | =item C<d_sresuproto>
|
---|
3300 |
|
---|
3301 | From F<d_sresuproto.U>:
|
---|
3302 |
|
---|
3303 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRESUID_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
3304 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
3305 | a prototype for the setresuid() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
3306 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
3307 |
|
---|
3308 | =item C<d_statblks>
|
---|
3309 |
|
---|
3310 | From F<d_statblks.U>:
|
---|
3311 |
|
---|
3312 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STAT_BLOCKS>
|
---|
3313 | if this system has a stat structure declaring
|
---|
3314 | st_blksize and st_blocks.
|
---|
3315 |
|
---|
3316 | =item C<d_statfs_f_flags>
|
---|
3317 |
|
---|
3318 | From F<d_statfs_f_flags.U>:
|
---|
3319 |
|
---|
3320 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_STATFS_F_FLAGS>
|
---|
3321 | symbol, which indicates to struct statfs from has f_flags member.
|
---|
3322 | This kind of struct statfs is coming from F<sys/mount.h> (C<BSD>),
|
---|
3323 | not from F<sys/statfs.h> (C<SYSV>).
|
---|
3324 |
|
---|
3325 | =item C<d_statfs_s>
|
---|
3326 |
|
---|
3327 | From F<d_statfs_s.U>:
|
---|
3328 |
|
---|
3329 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_STATFS> symbol,
|
---|
3330 | which indicates that the struct statfs is supported.
|
---|
3331 |
|
---|
3332 | =item C<d_statvfs>
|
---|
3333 |
|
---|
3334 | From F<d_statvfs.U>:
|
---|
3335 |
|
---|
3336 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STATVFS> symbol, which
|
---|
3337 | indicates to the C program that the statvfs() routine is available.
|
---|
3338 |
|
---|
3339 | =item C<d_stdio_cnt_lval>
|
---|
3340 |
|
---|
3341 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
3342 |
|
---|
3343 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDIO_CNT_LVALUE> if the
|
---|
3344 | C<FILE_cnt> macro can be used as an lvalue.
|
---|
3345 |
|
---|
3346 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval>
|
---|
3347 |
|
---|
3348 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
3349 |
|
---|
3350 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDIO_PTR_LVALUE> if the
|
---|
3351 | C<FILE_ptr> macro can be used as an lvalue.
|
---|
3352 |
|
---|
3353 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval_nochange_cnt>
|
---|
3354 |
|
---|
3355 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
3356 |
|
---|
3357 | This symbol is defined if using the C<FILE_ptr> macro as an lvalue
|
---|
3358 | to increase the pointer by n leaves File_cnt(fp) unchanged.
|
---|
3359 |
|
---|
3360 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval_sets_cnt>
|
---|
3361 |
|
---|
3362 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
3363 |
|
---|
3364 | This symbol is defined if using the C<FILE_ptr> macro as an lvalue
|
---|
3365 | to increase the pointer by n has the side effect of decreasing the
|
---|
3366 | value of File_cnt(fp) by n.
|
---|
3367 |
|
---|
3368 | =item C<d_stdio_stream_array>
|
---|
3369 |
|
---|
3370 | From F<stdio_streams.U>:
|
---|
3371 |
|
---|
3372 | This variable tells whether there is an array holding
|
---|
3373 | the stdio streams.
|
---|
3374 |
|
---|
3375 | =item C<d_stdiobase>
|
---|
3376 |
|
---|
3377 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
3378 |
|
---|
3379 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STDIO_BASE> if this system
|
---|
3380 | has a C<FILE> structure declaring a usable _base field (or equivalent)
|
---|
3381 | in F<stdio.h>.
|
---|
3382 |
|
---|
3383 | =item C<d_stdstdio>
|
---|
3384 |
|
---|
3385 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
3386 |
|
---|
3387 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STDIO_PTR> if this system
|
---|
3388 | has a C<FILE> structure declaring usable _ptr and _cnt fields (or
|
---|
3389 | equivalent) in F<stdio.h>.
|
---|
3390 |
|
---|
3391 | =item C<d_strchr>
|
---|
3392 |
|
---|
3393 | From F<d_strchr.U>:
|
---|
3394 |
|
---|
3395 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRCHR> if strchr() and
|
---|
3396 | strrchr() are available for string searching.
|
---|
3397 |
|
---|
3398 | =item C<d_strcoll>
|
---|
3399 |
|
---|
3400 | From F<d_strcoll.U>:
|
---|
3401 |
|
---|
3402 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRCOLL> if strcoll() is
|
---|
3403 | available to compare strings using collating information.
|
---|
3404 |
|
---|
3405 | =item C<d_strctcpy>
|
---|
3406 |
|
---|
3407 | From F<d_strctcpy.U>:
|
---|
3408 |
|
---|
3409 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_STRUCT_COPY> symbol, which
|
---|
3410 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows how to copy
|
---|
3411 | structures.
|
---|
3412 |
|
---|
3413 | =item C<d_strerrm>
|
---|
3414 |
|
---|
3415 | From F<d_strerror.U>:
|
---|
3416 |
|
---|
3417 | This variable holds what Strerrr is defined as to translate an error
|
---|
3418 | code condition into an error message string. It could be C<strerror>
|
---|
3419 | or a more C<complex> macro emulating strrror with sys_errlist[], or the
|
---|
3420 | C<unknown> string when both strerror and sys_errlist are missing.
|
---|
3421 |
|
---|
3422 | =item C<d_strerror>
|
---|
3423 |
|
---|
3424 | From F<d_strerror.U>:
|
---|
3425 |
|
---|
3426 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRERROR> if strerror() is
|
---|
3427 | available to translate error numbers to strings.
|
---|
3428 |
|
---|
3429 | =item C<d_strerror_r>
|
---|
3430 |
|
---|
3431 | From F<d_strerror_r.U>:
|
---|
3432 |
|
---|
3433 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRERROR_R> symbol,
|
---|
3434 | which indicates to the C program that the strerror_r()
|
---|
3435 | routine is available.
|
---|
3436 |
|
---|
3437 | =item C<d_strftime>
|
---|
3438 |
|
---|
3439 | From F<d_strftime.U>:
|
---|
3440 |
|
---|
3441 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRFTIME> symbol, which
|
---|
3442 | indicates to the C program that the strftime() routine is available.
|
---|
3443 |
|
---|
3444 | =item C<d_strlcat>
|
---|
3445 |
|
---|
3446 | From F<d_strlcat.U>:
|
---|
3447 |
|
---|
3448 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRLCAT> symbol, which
|
---|
3449 | indicates to the C program that the strlcat () routine is available.
|
---|
3450 |
|
---|
3451 | =item C<d_strlcpy>
|
---|
3452 |
|
---|
3453 | From F<d_strlcpy.U>:
|
---|
3454 |
|
---|
3455 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRLCPY> symbol, which
|
---|
3456 | indicates to the C program that the strlcpy () routine is available.
|
---|
3457 |
|
---|
3458 | =item C<d_strtod>
|
---|
3459 |
|
---|
3460 | From F<d_strtod.U>:
|
---|
3461 |
|
---|
3462 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOD> symbol, which
|
---|
3463 | indicates to the C program that the strtod() routine is available
|
---|
3464 | to provide better numeric string conversion than atof().
|
---|
3465 |
|
---|
3466 | =item C<d_strtol>
|
---|
3467 |
|
---|
3468 | From F<d_strtol.U>:
|
---|
3469 |
|
---|
3470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOL> symbol, which
|
---|
3471 | indicates to the C program that the strtol() routine is available
|
---|
3472 | to provide better numeric string conversion than atoi() and friends.
|
---|
3473 |
|
---|
3474 | =item C<d_strtold>
|
---|
3475 |
|
---|
3476 | From F<d_strtold.U>:
|
---|
3477 |
|
---|
3478 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOLD> symbol, which
|
---|
3479 | indicates to the C program that the strtold() routine is available.
|
---|
3480 |
|
---|
3481 | =item C<d_strtoll>
|
---|
3482 |
|
---|
3483 | From F<d_strtoll.U>:
|
---|
3484 |
|
---|
3485 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOLL> symbol, which
|
---|
3486 | indicates to the C program that the strtoll() routine is available.
|
---|
3487 |
|
---|
3488 | =item C<d_strtoq>
|
---|
3489 |
|
---|
3490 | From F<d_strtoq.U>:
|
---|
3491 |
|
---|
3492 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOQ> symbol, which
|
---|
3493 | indicates to the C program that the strtoq() routine is available.
|
---|
3494 |
|
---|
3495 | =item C<d_strtoul>
|
---|
3496 |
|
---|
3497 | From F<d_strtoul.U>:
|
---|
3498 |
|
---|
3499 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOUL> symbol, which
|
---|
3500 | indicates to the C program that the strtoul() routine is available
|
---|
3501 | to provide conversion of strings to unsigned long.
|
---|
3502 |
|
---|
3503 | =item C<d_strtoull>
|
---|
3504 |
|
---|
3505 | From F<d_strtoull.U>:
|
---|
3506 |
|
---|
3507 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOULL> symbol, which
|
---|
3508 | indicates to the C program that the strtoull() routine is available.
|
---|
3509 |
|
---|
3510 | =item C<d_strtouq>
|
---|
3511 |
|
---|
3512 | From F<d_strtouq.U>:
|
---|
3513 |
|
---|
3514 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOUQ> symbol, which
|
---|
3515 | indicates to the C program that the strtouq() routine is available.
|
---|
3516 |
|
---|
3517 | =item C<d_strxfrm>
|
---|
3518 |
|
---|
3519 | From F<d_strxfrm.U>:
|
---|
3520 |
|
---|
3521 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRXFRM> if strxfrm() is
|
---|
3522 | available to transform strings.
|
---|
3523 |
|
---|
3524 | =item C<d_suidsafe>
|
---|
3525 |
|
---|
3526 | From F<d_dosuid.U>:
|
---|
3527 |
|
---|
3528 | This variable conditionally defines C<SETUID_SCRIPTS_ARE_SECURE_NOW>
|
---|
3529 | if setuid scripts can be secure. This test looks in F</dev/fd/>.
|
---|
3530 |
|
---|
3531 | =item C<d_symlink>
|
---|
3532 |
|
---|
3533 | From F<d_symlink.U>:
|
---|
3534 |
|
---|
3535 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYMLINK> symbol, which
|
---|
3536 | indicates to the C program that the symlink() routine is available
|
---|
3537 | to create symbolic links.
|
---|
3538 |
|
---|
3539 | =item C<d_syscall>
|
---|
3540 |
|
---|
3541 | From F<d_syscall.U>:
|
---|
3542 |
|
---|
3543 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYSCALL> if syscall() is
|
---|
3544 | available call arbitrary system calls.
|
---|
3545 |
|
---|
3546 | =item C<d_syscallproto>
|
---|
3547 |
|
---|
3548 | From F<d_syscallproto.U>:
|
---|
3549 |
|
---|
3550 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYSCALL_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
3551 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
3552 | a prototype for the syscall() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
3553 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
3554 |
|
---|
3555 | =item C<d_sysconf>
|
---|
3556 |
|
---|
3557 | From F<d_sysconf.U>:
|
---|
3558 |
|
---|
3559 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYSCONF> symbol, which
|
---|
3560 | indicates to the C program that the sysconf() routine is available
|
---|
3561 | to determine system related limits and options.
|
---|
3562 |
|
---|
3563 | =item C<d_sysernlst>
|
---|
3564 |
|
---|
3565 | From F<d_strerror.U>:
|
---|
3566 |
|
---|
3567 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYS_ERRNOLIST> if sys_errnolist[]
|
---|
3568 | is available to translate error numbers to the symbolic name.
|
---|
3569 |
|
---|
3570 | =item C<d_syserrlst>
|
---|
3571 |
|
---|
3572 | From F<d_strerror.U>:
|
---|
3573 |
|
---|
3574 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYS_ERRLIST> if sys_errlist[] is
|
---|
3575 | available to translate error numbers to strings.
|
---|
3576 |
|
---|
3577 | =item C<d_system>
|
---|
3578 |
|
---|
3579 | From F<d_system.U>:
|
---|
3580 |
|
---|
3581 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYSTEM> if system() is
|
---|
3582 | available to issue a shell command.
|
---|
3583 |
|
---|
3584 | =item C<d_tcgetpgrp>
|
---|
3585 |
|
---|
3586 | From F<d_tcgtpgrp.U>:
|
---|
3587 |
|
---|
3588 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TCGETPGRP> symbol, which
|
---|
3589 | indicates to the C program that the tcgetpgrp() routine is available.
|
---|
3590 | to get foreground process group C<ID>.
|
---|
3591 |
|
---|
3592 | =item C<d_tcsetpgrp>
|
---|
3593 |
|
---|
3594 | From F<d_tcstpgrp.U>:
|
---|
3595 |
|
---|
3596 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TCSETPGRP> symbol, which
|
---|
3597 | indicates to the C program that the tcsetpgrp() routine is available
|
---|
3598 | to set foreground process group C<ID>.
|
---|
3599 |
|
---|
3600 | =item C<d_telldir>
|
---|
3601 |
|
---|
3602 | From F<d_readdir.U>:
|
---|
3603 |
|
---|
3604 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TELLDIR> if telldir() is
|
---|
3605 | available.
|
---|
3606 |
|
---|
3607 | =item C<d_telldirproto>
|
---|
3608 |
|
---|
3609 | From F<d_telldirproto.U>:
|
---|
3610 |
|
---|
3611 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TELLDIR_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
3612 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
3613 | a prototype for the telldir() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
3614 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
3615 |
|
---|
3616 | =item C<d_time>
|
---|
3617 |
|
---|
3618 | From F<d_time.U>:
|
---|
3619 |
|
---|
3620 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TIME> symbol, which indicates
|
---|
3621 | that the time() routine exists. The time() routine is normaly
|
---|
3622 | provided on C<UNIX> systems.
|
---|
3623 |
|
---|
3624 | =item C<d_times>
|
---|
3625 |
|
---|
3626 | From F<d_times.U>:
|
---|
3627 |
|
---|
3628 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TIMES> symbol, which indicates
|
---|
3629 | that the times() routine exists. The times() routine is normaly
|
---|
3630 | provided on C<UNIX> systems. You may have to include <sys/times.h>.
|
---|
3631 |
|
---|
3632 | =item C<d_tm_tm_gmtoff>
|
---|
3633 |
|
---|
3634 | From F<i_time.U>:
|
---|
3635 |
|
---|
3636 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TM_TM_GMTOFF>, which indicates
|
---|
3637 | indicates to the C program that the struct tm has the tm_gmtoff field.
|
---|
3638 |
|
---|
3639 | =item C<d_tm_tm_zone>
|
---|
3640 |
|
---|
3641 | From F<i_time.U>:
|
---|
3642 |
|
---|
3643 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TM_TM_ZONE>, which indicates
|
---|
3644 | indicates to the C program that the struct tm has the tm_zone field.
|
---|
3645 |
|
---|
3646 | =item C<d_tmpnam_r>
|
---|
3647 |
|
---|
3648 | From F<d_tmpnam_r.U>:
|
---|
3649 |
|
---|
3650 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TMPNAM_R> symbol,
|
---|
3651 | which indicates to the C program that the tmpnam_r()
|
---|
3652 | routine is available.
|
---|
3653 |
|
---|
3654 | =item C<d_truncate>
|
---|
3655 |
|
---|
3656 | From F<d_truncate.U>:
|
---|
3657 |
|
---|
3658 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TRUNCATE> if truncate() is
|
---|
3659 | available to truncate files.
|
---|
3660 |
|
---|
3661 | =item C<d_ttyname_r>
|
---|
3662 |
|
---|
3663 | From F<d_ttyname_r.U>:
|
---|
3664 |
|
---|
3665 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TTYNAME_R> symbol,
|
---|
3666 | which indicates to the C program that the ttyname_r()
|
---|
3667 | routine is available.
|
---|
3668 |
|
---|
3669 | =item C<d_tzname>
|
---|
3670 |
|
---|
3671 | From F<d_tzname.U>:
|
---|
3672 |
|
---|
3673 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TZNAME> if tzname[] is
|
---|
3674 | available to access timezone names.
|
---|
3675 |
|
---|
3676 | =item C<d_u32align>
|
---|
3677 |
|
---|
3678 | From F<d_u32align.U>:
|
---|
3679 |
|
---|
3680 | This variable tells whether you must access character data
|
---|
3681 | through U32-aligned pointers.
|
---|
3682 |
|
---|
3683 | =item C<d_ualarm>
|
---|
3684 |
|
---|
3685 | From F<d_ualarm.U>:
|
---|
3686 |
|
---|
3687 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UALARM> symbol, which
|
---|
3688 | indicates to the C program that the ualarm() routine is available.
|
---|
3689 |
|
---|
3690 | =item C<d_umask>
|
---|
3691 |
|
---|
3692 | From F<d_umask.U>:
|
---|
3693 |
|
---|
3694 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UMASK> symbol, which
|
---|
3695 | indicates to the C program that the umask() routine is available.
|
---|
3696 | to set and get the value of the file creation mask.
|
---|
3697 |
|
---|
3698 | =item C<d_uname>
|
---|
3699 |
|
---|
3700 | From F<d_gethname.U>:
|
---|
3701 |
|
---|
3702 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNAME> symbol, which
|
---|
3703 | indicates to the C program that the uname() routine may be
|
---|
3704 | used to derive the host name.
|
---|
3705 |
|
---|
3706 | =item C<d_union_semun>
|
---|
3707 |
|
---|
3708 | From F<d_union_semun.U>:
|
---|
3709 |
|
---|
3710 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_UNION_SEMUN> if the
|
---|
3711 | union semun is defined by including <sys/sem.h>.
|
---|
3712 |
|
---|
3713 | =item C<d_unordered>
|
---|
3714 |
|
---|
3715 | From F<d_unordered.U>:
|
---|
3716 |
|
---|
3717 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNORDERED> symbol, which
|
---|
3718 | indicates to the C program that the unordered() routine is available.
|
---|
3719 |
|
---|
3720 | =item C<d_unsetenv>
|
---|
3721 |
|
---|
3722 | From F<d_unsetenv.U>:
|
---|
3723 |
|
---|
3724 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNSETENV> symbol, which
|
---|
3725 | indicates to the C program that the unsetenv () routine is available.
|
---|
3726 |
|
---|
3727 | =item C<d_usleep>
|
---|
3728 |
|
---|
3729 | From F<d_usleep.U>:
|
---|
3730 |
|
---|
3731 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_USLEEP> if usleep() is
|
---|
3732 | available to do high granularity sleeps.
|
---|
3733 |
|
---|
3734 | =item C<d_usleepproto>
|
---|
3735 |
|
---|
3736 | From F<d_usleepproto.U>:
|
---|
3737 |
|
---|
3738 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_USLEEP_PROTO> symbol,
|
---|
3739 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides
|
---|
3740 | a prototype for the usleep() function. Otherwise, it is
|
---|
3741 | up to the program to supply one.
|
---|
3742 |
|
---|
3743 | =item C<d_ustat>
|
---|
3744 |
|
---|
3745 | From F<d_ustat.U>:
|
---|
3746 |
|
---|
3747 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_USTAT> if ustat() is
|
---|
3748 | available to query file system statistics by dev_t.
|
---|
3749 |
|
---|
3750 | =item C<d_vendorarch>
|
---|
3751 |
|
---|
3752 | From F<vendorarch.U>:
|
---|
3753 |
|
---|
3754 | This variable conditionally defined C<PERL_VENDORARCH>.
|
---|
3755 |
|
---|
3756 | =item C<d_vendorbin>
|
---|
3757 |
|
---|
3758 | From F<vendorbin.U>:
|
---|
3759 |
|
---|
3760 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORBIN>.
|
---|
3761 |
|
---|
3762 | =item C<d_vendorlib>
|
---|
3763 |
|
---|
3764 | From F<vendorlib.U>:
|
---|
3765 |
|
---|
3766 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORLIB>.
|
---|
3767 |
|
---|
3768 | =item C<d_vendorscript>
|
---|
3769 |
|
---|
3770 | From F<vendorscript.U>:
|
---|
3771 |
|
---|
3772 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORSCRIPT>.
|
---|
3773 |
|
---|
3774 | =item C<d_vfork>
|
---|
3775 |
|
---|
3776 | From F<d_vfork.U>:
|
---|
3777 |
|
---|
3778 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_VFORK> symbol, which
|
---|
3779 | indicates the vfork() routine is available.
|
---|
3780 |
|
---|
3781 | =item C<d_void_closedir>
|
---|
3782 |
|
---|
3783 | From F<d_closedir.U>:
|
---|
3784 |
|
---|
3785 | This variable conditionally defines C<VOID_CLOSEDIR> if closedir()
|
---|
3786 | does not return a value.
|
---|
3787 |
|
---|
3788 | =item C<d_voidsig>
|
---|
3789 |
|
---|
3790 | From F<d_voidsig.U>:
|
---|
3791 |
|
---|
3792 | This variable conditionally defines C<VOIDSIG> if this system
|
---|
3793 | declares "void (*signal(...))()" in F<signal.h>. The old way was to
|
---|
3794 | declare it as "int (*signal(...))()".
|
---|
3795 |
|
---|
3796 | =item C<d_voidtty>
|
---|
3797 |
|
---|
3798 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>:
|
---|
3799 |
|
---|
3800 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_IOCNOTTY> to indicate that the
|
---|
3801 | ioctl() call with C<TIOCNOTTY> should be used to void tty association.
|
---|
3802 | Otherwise (on C<USG> probably), it is enough to close the standard file
|
---|
3803 | decriptors and do a setpgrp().
|
---|
3804 |
|
---|
3805 | =item C<d_volatile>
|
---|
3806 |
|
---|
3807 | From F<d_volatile.U>:
|
---|
3808 |
|
---|
3809 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HASVOLATILE> symbol, which
|
---|
3810 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows about the
|
---|
3811 | volatile declaration.
|
---|
3812 |
|
---|
3813 | =item C<d_vprintf>
|
---|
3814 |
|
---|
3815 | From F<d_vprintf.U>:
|
---|
3816 |
|
---|
3817 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_VPRINTF> symbol, which
|
---|
3818 | indicates to the C program that the vprintf() routine is available
|
---|
3819 | to printf with a pointer to an argument list.
|
---|
3820 |
|
---|
3821 | =item C<d_wait4>
|
---|
3822 |
|
---|
3823 | From F<d_wait4.U>:
|
---|
3824 |
|
---|
3825 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_WAIT4 symbol, which
|
---|
3826 | indicates the wait4() routine is available.
|
---|
3827 |
|
---|
3828 | =item C<d_waitpid>
|
---|
3829 |
|
---|
3830 | From F<d_waitpid.U>:
|
---|
3831 |
|
---|
3832 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_WAITPID> if waitpid() is
|
---|
3833 | available to wait for child process.
|
---|
3834 |
|
---|
3835 | =item C<d_wcstombs>
|
---|
3836 |
|
---|
3837 | From F<d_wcstombs.U>:
|
---|
3838 |
|
---|
3839 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WCSTOMBS> symbol, which
|
---|
3840 | indicates to the C program that the wcstombs() routine is available
|
---|
3841 | to convert wide character strings to multibyte strings.
|
---|
3842 |
|
---|
3843 | =item C<d_wctomb>
|
---|
3844 |
|
---|
3845 | From F<d_wctomb.U>:
|
---|
3846 |
|
---|
3847 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WCTOMB> symbol, which
|
---|
3848 | indicates to the C program that the wctomb() routine is available
|
---|
3849 | to convert a wide character to a multibyte.
|
---|
3850 |
|
---|
3851 | =item C<d_writev>
|
---|
3852 |
|
---|
3853 | From F<d_writev.U>:
|
---|
3854 |
|
---|
3855 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WRITEV> symbol, which
|
---|
3856 | indicates to the C program that the writev() routine is available.
|
---|
3857 |
|
---|
3858 | =item C<d_xenix>
|
---|
3859 |
|
---|
3860 | From F<Guess.U>:
|
---|
3861 |
|
---|
3862 | This variable conditionally defines the symbol C<XENIX>, which alerts
|
---|
3863 | the C program that it runs under Xenix.
|
---|
3864 |
|
---|
3865 | =item C<date>
|
---|
3866 |
|
---|
3867 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
3868 |
|
---|
3869 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
3870 | full pathname (if any) of the date program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
3871 | the value is reset to a plain C<date> and is not useful.
|
---|
3872 |
|
---|
3873 | =item C<db_hashtype>
|
---|
3874 |
|
---|
3875 | From F<i_db.U>:
|
---|
3876 |
|
---|
3877 | This variable contains the type of the hash structure element
|
---|
3878 | in the <db.h> header file. In older versions of C<DB>, it was
|
---|
3879 | int, while in newer ones it is u_int32_t.
|
---|
3880 |
|
---|
3881 | =item C<db_prefixtype>
|
---|
3882 |
|
---|
3883 | From F<i_db.U>:
|
---|
3884 |
|
---|
3885 | This variable contains the type of the prefix structure element
|
---|
3886 | in the <db.h> header file. In older versions of C<DB>, it was
|
---|
3887 | int, while in newer ones it is size_t.
|
---|
3888 |
|
---|
3889 | =item C<db_version_major>
|
---|
3890 |
|
---|
3891 | From F<i_db.U>:
|
---|
3892 |
|
---|
3893 | This variable contains the major version number of
|
---|
3894 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file.
|
---|
3895 |
|
---|
3896 | =item C<db_version_minor>
|
---|
3897 |
|
---|
3898 | From F<i_db.U>:
|
---|
3899 |
|
---|
3900 | This variable contains the minor version number of
|
---|
3901 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file.
|
---|
3902 | For C<DB> version 1 this is always 0.
|
---|
3903 |
|
---|
3904 | =item C<db_version_patch>
|
---|
3905 |
|
---|
3906 | From F<i_db.U>:
|
---|
3907 |
|
---|
3908 | This variable contains the patch version number of
|
---|
3909 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file.
|
---|
3910 | For C<DB> version 1 this is always 0.
|
---|
3911 |
|
---|
3912 | =item C<defvoidused>
|
---|
3913 |
|
---|
3914 | From F<voidflags.U>:
|
---|
3915 |
|
---|
3916 | This variable contains the default value of the C<VOIDUSED> symbol (15).
|
---|
3917 |
|
---|
3918 | =item C<direntrytype>
|
---|
3919 |
|
---|
3920 | From F<i_dirent.U>:
|
---|
3921 |
|
---|
3922 | This symbol is set to C<struct direct> or C<struct dirent> depending on
|
---|
3923 | whether dirent is available or not. You should use this pseudo type to
|
---|
3924 | portably declare your directory entries.
|
---|
3925 |
|
---|
3926 | =item C<dlext>
|
---|
3927 |
|
---|
3928 | From F<dlext.U>:
|
---|
3929 |
|
---|
3930 | This variable contains the extension that is to be used for the
|
---|
3931 | dynamically loaded modules that perl generaties.
|
---|
3932 |
|
---|
3933 | =item C<dlsrc>
|
---|
3934 |
|
---|
3935 | From F<dlsrc.U>:
|
---|
3936 |
|
---|
3937 | This variable contains the name of the dynamic loading file that
|
---|
3938 | will be used with the package.
|
---|
3939 |
|
---|
3940 | =item C<doublesize>
|
---|
3941 |
|
---|
3942 | From F<doublesize.U>:
|
---|
3943 |
|
---|
3944 | This variable contains the value of the C<DOUBLESIZE> symbol, which
|
---|
3945 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a double.
|
---|
3946 |
|
---|
3947 | =item C<drand01>
|
---|
3948 |
|
---|
3949 | From F<randfunc.U>:
|
---|
3950 |
|
---|
3951 | Indicates the macro to be used to generate normalized
|
---|
3952 | random numbers. Uses randfunc, often divided by
|
---|
3953 | (double) (((unsigned long) 1 << randbits)) in order to
|
---|
3954 | normalize the result.
|
---|
3955 | In C programs, the macro C<Drand01> is mapped to drand01.
|
---|
3956 |
|
---|
3957 | =item C<drand48_r_proto>
|
---|
3958 |
|
---|
3959 | From F<d_drand48_r.U>:
|
---|
3960 |
|
---|
3961 | This variable encodes the prototype of drand48_r.
|
---|
3962 | It is zero if d_drand48_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
3963 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_drand48_r
|
---|
3964 | is defined.
|
---|
3965 |
|
---|
3966 | =item C<dynamic_ext>
|
---|
3967 |
|
---|
3968 | From F<Extensions.U>:
|
---|
3969 |
|
---|
3970 | This variable holds a list of C<XS> extension files we want to
|
---|
3971 | link dynamically into the package. It is used by Makefile.
|
---|
3972 |
|
---|
3973 | =back
|
---|
3974 |
|
---|
3975 | =head2 e
|
---|
3976 |
|
---|
3977 | =over 4
|
---|
3978 |
|
---|
3979 | =item C<eagain>
|
---|
3980 |
|
---|
3981 | From F<nblock_io.U>:
|
---|
3982 |
|
---|
3983 | This variable bears the symbolic errno code set by read() when no
|
---|
3984 | data is present on the file and non-blocking I/O was enabled (otherwise,
|
---|
3985 | read() blocks naturally).
|
---|
3986 |
|
---|
3987 | =item C<ebcdic>
|
---|
3988 |
|
---|
3989 | From F<ebcdic.U>:
|
---|
3990 |
|
---|
3991 | This variable conditionally defines C<EBCDIC> if this
|
---|
3992 | system uses C<EBCDIC> encoding. Among other things, this
|
---|
3993 | means that the character ranges are not contiguous.
|
---|
3994 | See F<trnl.U>
|
---|
3995 |
|
---|
3996 | =item C<echo>
|
---|
3997 |
|
---|
3998 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
3999 |
|
---|
4000 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
4001 | full pathname (if any) of the echo program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
4002 | the value is reset to a plain C<echo> and is not useful.
|
---|
4003 |
|
---|
4004 | =item C<egrep>
|
---|
4005 |
|
---|
4006 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
4007 |
|
---|
4008 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
4009 | full pathname (if any) of the egrep program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
4010 | the value is reset to a plain C<egrep> and is not useful.
|
---|
4011 |
|
---|
4012 | =item C<emacs>
|
---|
4013 |
|
---|
4014 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
4015 |
|
---|
4016 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
4017 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
4018 |
|
---|
4019 | =item C<endgrent_r_proto>
|
---|
4020 |
|
---|
4021 | From F<d_endgrent_r.U>:
|
---|
4022 |
|
---|
4023 | This variable encodes the prototype of endgrent_r.
|
---|
4024 | It is zero if d_endgrent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4025 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endgrent_r
|
---|
4026 | is defined.
|
---|
4027 |
|
---|
4028 | =item C<endhostent_r_proto>
|
---|
4029 |
|
---|
4030 | From F<d_endhostent_r.U>:
|
---|
4031 |
|
---|
4032 | This variable encodes the prototype of endhostent_r.
|
---|
4033 | It is zero if d_endhostent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4034 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endhostent_r
|
---|
4035 | is defined.
|
---|
4036 |
|
---|
4037 | =item C<endnetent_r_proto>
|
---|
4038 |
|
---|
4039 | From F<d_endnetent_r.U>:
|
---|
4040 |
|
---|
4041 | This variable encodes the prototype of endnetent_r.
|
---|
4042 | It is zero if d_endnetent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4043 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endnetent_r
|
---|
4044 | is defined.
|
---|
4045 |
|
---|
4046 | =item C<endprotoent_r_proto>
|
---|
4047 |
|
---|
4048 | From F<d_endprotoent_r.U>:
|
---|
4049 |
|
---|
4050 | This variable encodes the prototype of endprotoent_r.
|
---|
4051 | It is zero if d_endprotoent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4052 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endprotoent_r
|
---|
4053 | is defined.
|
---|
4054 |
|
---|
4055 | =item C<endpwent_r_proto>
|
---|
4056 |
|
---|
4057 | From F<d_endpwent_r.U>:
|
---|
4058 |
|
---|
4059 | This variable encodes the prototype of endpwent_r.
|
---|
4060 | It is zero if d_endpwent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4061 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endpwent_r
|
---|
4062 | is defined.
|
---|
4063 |
|
---|
4064 | =item C<endservent_r_proto>
|
---|
4065 |
|
---|
4066 | From F<d_endservent_r.U>:
|
---|
4067 |
|
---|
4068 | This variable encodes the prototype of endservent_r.
|
---|
4069 | It is zero if d_endservent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4070 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endservent_r
|
---|
4071 | is defined.
|
---|
4072 |
|
---|
4073 | =item C<eunicefix>
|
---|
4074 |
|
---|
4075 | From F<Init.U>:
|
---|
4076 |
|
---|
4077 | When running under Eunice this variable contains a command which will
|
---|
4078 | convert a shell script to the proper form of text file for it to be
|
---|
4079 | executable by the shell. On other systems it is a no-op.
|
---|
4080 |
|
---|
4081 | =item C<exe_ext>
|
---|
4082 |
|
---|
4083 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
4084 |
|
---|
4085 | This is an old synonym for _exe.
|
---|
4086 |
|
---|
4087 | =item C<expr>
|
---|
4088 |
|
---|
4089 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
4090 |
|
---|
4091 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
4092 | full pathname (if any) of the expr program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
4093 | the value is reset to a plain C<expr> and is not useful.
|
---|
4094 |
|
---|
4095 | =item C<extensions>
|
---|
4096 |
|
---|
4097 | From F<Extensions.U>:
|
---|
4098 |
|
---|
4099 | This variable holds a list of all extension files (both C<XS> and
|
---|
4100 | non-xs linked into the package. It is propagated to F<Config.pm>
|
---|
4101 | and is typically used to test whether a particular extesion
|
---|
4102 | is available.
|
---|
4103 |
|
---|
4104 | =item C<extras>
|
---|
4105 |
|
---|
4106 | From F<Extras.U>:
|
---|
4107 |
|
---|
4108 | This variable holds a list of extra modules to install.
|
---|
4109 |
|
---|
4110 | =back
|
---|
4111 |
|
---|
4112 | =head2 f
|
---|
4113 |
|
---|
4114 | =over 4
|
---|
4115 |
|
---|
4116 | =item C<fflushall>
|
---|
4117 |
|
---|
4118 | From F<fflushall.U>:
|
---|
4119 |
|
---|
4120 | This symbol, if defined, tells that to flush
|
---|
4121 | all pending stdio output one must loop through all
|
---|
4122 | the stdio file handles stored in an array and fflush them.
|
---|
4123 | Note that if fflushNULL is defined, fflushall will not
|
---|
4124 | even be probed for and will be left undefined.
|
---|
4125 |
|
---|
4126 | =item C<fflushNULL>
|
---|
4127 |
|
---|
4128 | From F<fflushall.U>:
|
---|
4129 |
|
---|
4130 | This symbol, if defined, tells that fflush(C<NULL>) does flush
|
---|
4131 | all pending stdio output.
|
---|
4132 |
|
---|
4133 | =item C<find>
|
---|
4134 |
|
---|
4135 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
4136 |
|
---|
4137 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
4138 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
4139 |
|
---|
4140 | =item C<firstmakefile>
|
---|
4141 |
|
---|
4142 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
4143 |
|
---|
4144 | This variable defines the first file searched by make. On unix,
|
---|
4145 | it is makefile (then Makefile). On case-insensitive systems,
|
---|
4146 | it might be something else. This is only used to deal with
|
---|
4147 | convoluted make depend tricks.
|
---|
4148 |
|
---|
4149 | =item C<flex>
|
---|
4150 |
|
---|
4151 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
4152 |
|
---|
4153 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
4154 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
4155 |
|
---|
4156 | =item C<fpossize>
|
---|
4157 |
|
---|
4158 | From F<fpossize.U>:
|
---|
4159 |
|
---|
4160 | This variable contains the size of a fpostype in bytes.
|
---|
4161 |
|
---|
4162 | =item C<fpostype>
|
---|
4163 |
|
---|
4164 | From F<fpostype.U>:
|
---|
4165 |
|
---|
4166 | This variable defines Fpos_t to be something like fpos_t, long,
|
---|
4167 | uint, or whatever type is used to declare file positions in libc.
|
---|
4168 |
|
---|
4169 | =item C<freetype>
|
---|
4170 |
|
---|
4171 | From F<mallocsrc.U>:
|
---|
4172 |
|
---|
4173 | This variable contains the return type of free(). It is usually
|
---|
4174 | void, but occasionally int.
|
---|
4175 |
|
---|
4176 | =item C<from>
|
---|
4177 |
|
---|
4178 | From F<Cross.U>:
|
---|
4179 |
|
---|
4180 | This variable contains the command used by Configure
|
---|
4181 | to copy files from the target host. Useful and available
|
---|
4182 | only during Perl build.
|
---|
4183 | The string C<:> if not cross-compiling.
|
---|
4184 |
|
---|
4185 | =item C<full_ar>
|
---|
4186 |
|
---|
4187 | From F<Loc_ar.U>:
|
---|
4188 |
|
---|
4189 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<ar>, whether or
|
---|
4190 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used
|
---|
4191 | in the F<Makefile.SH>.
|
---|
4192 |
|
---|
4193 | =item C<full_csh>
|
---|
4194 |
|
---|
4195 | From F<d_csh.U>:
|
---|
4196 |
|
---|
4197 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<csh>, whether or
|
---|
4198 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used
|
---|
4199 | in the compiled C program, and we assume that all systems which
|
---|
4200 | can share this executable will have the same full pathname to
|
---|
4201 | F<csh.>
|
---|
4202 |
|
---|
4203 | =item C<full_sed>
|
---|
4204 |
|
---|
4205 | From F<Loc_sed.U>:
|
---|
4206 |
|
---|
4207 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<sed>, whether or
|
---|
4208 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used
|
---|
4209 | in the compiled C program, and we assume that all systems which
|
---|
4210 | can share this executable will have the same full pathname to
|
---|
4211 | F<sed.>
|
---|
4212 |
|
---|
4213 | =back
|
---|
4214 |
|
---|
4215 | =head2 g
|
---|
4216 |
|
---|
4217 | =over 4
|
---|
4218 |
|
---|
4219 | =item C<gccansipedantic>
|
---|
4220 |
|
---|
4221 | From F<gccvers.U>:
|
---|
4222 |
|
---|
4223 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable will enable (if set) the
|
---|
4224 | -ansi and -pedantic ccflags for building core files (through
|
---|
4225 | cflags script). (See F<Porting/pumpkin.pod> for full description).
|
---|
4226 |
|
---|
4227 | =item C<gccosandvers>
|
---|
4228 |
|
---|
4229 | From F<gccvers.U>:
|
---|
4230 |
|
---|
4231 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable holds the operating system
|
---|
4232 | and version used to compile gcc. It is set to '' if not gcc,
|
---|
4233 | or if nothing useful can be parsed as the os version.
|
---|
4234 |
|
---|
4235 | =item C<gccversion>
|
---|
4236 |
|
---|
4237 | From F<gccvers.U>:
|
---|
4238 |
|
---|
4239 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable holds C<1> or C<2> to
|
---|
4240 | indicate whether the compiler is version 1 or 2. This is used in
|
---|
4241 | setting some of the default cflags. It is set to '' if not gcc.
|
---|
4242 |
|
---|
4243 | =item C<getgrent_r_proto>
|
---|
4244 |
|
---|
4245 | From F<d_getgrent_r.U>:
|
---|
4246 |
|
---|
4247 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrent_r.
|
---|
4248 | It is zero if d_getgrent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4249 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrent_r
|
---|
4250 | is defined.
|
---|
4251 |
|
---|
4252 | =item C<getgrgid_r_proto>
|
---|
4253 |
|
---|
4254 | From F<d_getgrgid_r.U>:
|
---|
4255 |
|
---|
4256 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrgid_r.
|
---|
4257 | It is zero if d_getgrgid_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4258 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrgid_r
|
---|
4259 | is defined.
|
---|
4260 |
|
---|
4261 | =item C<getgrnam_r_proto>
|
---|
4262 |
|
---|
4263 | From F<d_getgrnam_r.U>:
|
---|
4264 |
|
---|
4265 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrnam_r.
|
---|
4266 | It is zero if d_getgrnam_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4267 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrnam_r
|
---|
4268 | is defined.
|
---|
4269 |
|
---|
4270 | =item C<gethostbyaddr_r_proto>
|
---|
4271 |
|
---|
4272 | From F<d_gethostbyaddr_r.U>:
|
---|
4273 |
|
---|
4274 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostbyaddr_r.
|
---|
4275 | It is zero if d_gethostbyaddr_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4276 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostbyaddr_r
|
---|
4277 | is defined.
|
---|
4278 |
|
---|
4279 | =item C<gethostbyname_r_proto>
|
---|
4280 |
|
---|
4281 | From F<d_gethostbyname_r.U>:
|
---|
4282 |
|
---|
4283 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostbyname_r.
|
---|
4284 | It is zero if d_gethostbyname_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4285 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostbyname_r
|
---|
4286 | is defined.
|
---|
4287 |
|
---|
4288 | =item C<gethostent_r_proto>
|
---|
4289 |
|
---|
4290 | From F<d_gethostent_r.U>:
|
---|
4291 |
|
---|
4292 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostent_r.
|
---|
4293 | It is zero if d_gethostent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4294 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostent_r
|
---|
4295 | is defined.
|
---|
4296 |
|
---|
4297 | =item C<getlogin_r_proto>
|
---|
4298 |
|
---|
4299 | From F<d_getlogin_r.U>:
|
---|
4300 |
|
---|
4301 | This variable encodes the prototype of getlogin_r.
|
---|
4302 | It is zero if d_getlogin_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4303 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getlogin_r
|
---|
4304 | is defined.
|
---|
4305 |
|
---|
4306 | =item C<getnetbyaddr_r_proto>
|
---|
4307 |
|
---|
4308 | From F<d_getnetbyaddr_r.U>:
|
---|
4309 |
|
---|
4310 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetbyaddr_r.
|
---|
4311 | It is zero if d_getnetbyaddr_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4312 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetbyaddr_r
|
---|
4313 | is defined.
|
---|
4314 |
|
---|
4315 | =item C<getnetbyname_r_proto>
|
---|
4316 |
|
---|
4317 | From F<d_getnetbyname_r.U>:
|
---|
4318 |
|
---|
4319 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetbyname_r.
|
---|
4320 | It is zero if d_getnetbyname_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4321 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetbyname_r
|
---|
4322 | is defined.
|
---|
4323 |
|
---|
4324 | =item C<getnetent_r_proto>
|
---|
4325 |
|
---|
4326 | From F<d_getnetent_r.U>:
|
---|
4327 |
|
---|
4328 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetent_r.
|
---|
4329 | It is zero if d_getnetent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4330 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetent_r
|
---|
4331 | is defined.
|
---|
4332 |
|
---|
4333 | =item C<getprotobyname_r_proto>
|
---|
4334 |
|
---|
4335 | From F<d_getprotobyname_r.U>:
|
---|
4336 |
|
---|
4337 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotobyname_r.
|
---|
4338 | It is zero if d_getprotobyname_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4339 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotobyname_r
|
---|
4340 | is defined.
|
---|
4341 |
|
---|
4342 | =item C<getprotobynumber_r_proto>
|
---|
4343 |
|
---|
4344 | From F<d_getprotobynumber_r.U>:
|
---|
4345 |
|
---|
4346 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotobynumber_r.
|
---|
4347 | It is zero if d_getprotobynumber_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4348 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotobynumber_r
|
---|
4349 | is defined.
|
---|
4350 |
|
---|
4351 | =item C<getprotoent_r_proto>
|
---|
4352 |
|
---|
4353 | From F<d_getprotoent_r.U>:
|
---|
4354 |
|
---|
4355 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotoent_r.
|
---|
4356 | It is zero if d_getprotoent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4357 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotoent_r
|
---|
4358 | is defined.
|
---|
4359 |
|
---|
4360 | =item C<getpwent_r_proto>
|
---|
4361 |
|
---|
4362 | From F<d_getpwent_r.U>:
|
---|
4363 |
|
---|
4364 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwent_r.
|
---|
4365 | It is zero if d_getpwent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4366 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwent_r
|
---|
4367 | is defined.
|
---|
4368 |
|
---|
4369 | =item C<getpwnam_r_proto>
|
---|
4370 |
|
---|
4371 | From F<d_getpwnam_r.U>:
|
---|
4372 |
|
---|
4373 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwnam_r.
|
---|
4374 | It is zero if d_getpwnam_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4375 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwnam_r
|
---|
4376 | is defined.
|
---|
4377 |
|
---|
4378 | =item C<getpwuid_r_proto>
|
---|
4379 |
|
---|
4380 | From F<d_getpwuid_r.U>:
|
---|
4381 |
|
---|
4382 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwuid_r.
|
---|
4383 | It is zero if d_getpwuid_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4384 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwuid_r
|
---|
4385 | is defined.
|
---|
4386 |
|
---|
4387 | =item C<getservbyname_r_proto>
|
---|
4388 |
|
---|
4389 | From F<d_getservbyname_r.U>:
|
---|
4390 |
|
---|
4391 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservbyname_r.
|
---|
4392 | It is zero if d_getservbyname_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4393 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservbyname_r
|
---|
4394 | is defined.
|
---|
4395 |
|
---|
4396 | =item C<getservbyport_r_proto>
|
---|
4397 |
|
---|
4398 | From F<d_getservbyport_r.U>:
|
---|
4399 |
|
---|
4400 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservbyport_r.
|
---|
4401 | It is zero if d_getservbyport_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4402 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservbyport_r
|
---|
4403 | is defined.
|
---|
4404 |
|
---|
4405 | =item C<getservent_r_proto>
|
---|
4406 |
|
---|
4407 | From F<d_getservent_r.U>:
|
---|
4408 |
|
---|
4409 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservent_r.
|
---|
4410 | It is zero if d_getservent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4411 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservent_r
|
---|
4412 | is defined.
|
---|
4413 |
|
---|
4414 | =item C<getspnam_r_proto>
|
---|
4415 |
|
---|
4416 | From F<d_getspnam_r.U>:
|
---|
4417 |
|
---|
4418 | This variable encodes the prototype of getspnam_r.
|
---|
4419 | It is zero if d_getspnam_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4420 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getspnam_r
|
---|
4421 | is defined.
|
---|
4422 |
|
---|
4423 | =item C<gidformat>
|
---|
4424 |
|
---|
4425 | From F<gidf.U>:
|
---|
4426 |
|
---|
4427 | This variable contains the format string used for printing a Gid_t.
|
---|
4428 |
|
---|
4429 | =item C<gidsign>
|
---|
4430 |
|
---|
4431 | From F<gidsign.U>:
|
---|
4432 |
|
---|
4433 | This variable contains the signedness of a gidtype.
|
---|
4434 | 1 for unsigned, -1 for signed.
|
---|
4435 |
|
---|
4436 | =item C<gidsize>
|
---|
4437 |
|
---|
4438 | From F<gidsize.U>:
|
---|
4439 |
|
---|
4440 | This variable contains the size of a gidtype in bytes.
|
---|
4441 |
|
---|
4442 | =item C<gidtype>
|
---|
4443 |
|
---|
4444 | From F<gidtype.U>:
|
---|
4445 |
|
---|
4446 | This variable defines Gid_t to be something like gid_t, int,
|
---|
4447 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare the return type
|
---|
4448 | of getgid(). Typically, it is the type of group ids in the kernel.
|
---|
4449 |
|
---|
4450 | =item C<glibpth>
|
---|
4451 |
|
---|
4452 | From F<libpth.U>:
|
---|
4453 |
|
---|
4454 | This variable holds the general path (space-separated) used to
|
---|
4455 | find libraries. It may contain directories that do not exist on
|
---|
4456 | this platform, libpth is the cleaned-up version.
|
---|
4457 |
|
---|
4458 | =item C<gmake>
|
---|
4459 |
|
---|
4460 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
4461 |
|
---|
4462 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
4463 | full pathname (if any) of the gmake program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
4464 | the value is reset to a plain C<gmake> and is not useful.
|
---|
4465 |
|
---|
4466 | =item C<gmtime_r_proto>
|
---|
4467 |
|
---|
4468 | From F<d_gmtime_r.U>:
|
---|
4469 |
|
---|
4470 | This variable encodes the prototype of gmtime_r.
|
---|
4471 | It is zero if d_gmtime_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
4472 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gmtime_r
|
---|
4473 | is defined.
|
---|
4474 |
|
---|
4475 | =item C<gnulibc_version>
|
---|
4476 |
|
---|
4477 | From F<d_gnulibc.U>:
|
---|
4478 |
|
---|
4479 | This variable contains the version number of the C<GNU> C library.
|
---|
4480 | It is usually something like F<2.2.5>. It is a plain '' if this
|
---|
4481 | is not the C<GNU> C library, or if the version is unknown.
|
---|
4482 |
|
---|
4483 | =item C<grep>
|
---|
4484 |
|
---|
4485 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
4486 |
|
---|
4487 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
4488 | full pathname (if any) of the grep program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
4489 | the value is reset to a plain C<grep> and is not useful.
|
---|
4490 |
|
---|
4491 | =item C<groupcat>
|
---|
4492 |
|
---|
4493 | From F<nis.U>:
|
---|
4494 |
|
---|
4495 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the
|
---|
4496 | F</etc/group> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/group>", but can be
|
---|
4497 | "ypcat group" when C<NIS> is used.
|
---|
4498 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent
|
---|
4499 | command, in which case this variable is unset.
|
---|
4500 |
|
---|
4501 | =item C<groupstype>
|
---|
4502 |
|
---|
4503 | From F<groupstype.U>:
|
---|
4504 |
|
---|
4505 | This variable defines Groups_t to be something like gid_t, int,
|
---|
4506 | ushort, or whatever type is used for the second argument to
|
---|
4507 | getgroups() and setgroups(). Usually, this is the same as
|
---|
4508 | gidtype (gid_t), but sometimes it isn't.
|
---|
4509 |
|
---|
4510 | =item C<gzip>
|
---|
4511 |
|
---|
4512 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
4513 |
|
---|
4514 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
4515 | full pathname (if any) of the gzip program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
4516 | the value is reset to a plain C<gzip> and is not useful.
|
---|
4517 |
|
---|
4518 | =back
|
---|
4519 |
|
---|
4520 | =head2 h
|
---|
4521 |
|
---|
4522 | =over 4
|
---|
4523 |
|
---|
4524 | =item C<h_fcntl>
|
---|
4525 |
|
---|
4526 | From F<h_fcntl.U>:
|
---|
4527 |
|
---|
4528 | This is variable gets set in various places to tell i_fcntl that
|
---|
4529 | <fcntl.h> should be included.
|
---|
4530 |
|
---|
4531 | =item C<h_sysfile>
|
---|
4532 |
|
---|
4533 | From F<h_sysfile.U>:
|
---|
4534 |
|
---|
4535 | This is variable gets set in various places to tell i_sys_file that
|
---|
4536 | <sys/file.h> should be included.
|
---|
4537 |
|
---|
4538 | =item C<hint>
|
---|
4539 |
|
---|
4540 | From F<Oldconfig.U>:
|
---|
4541 |
|
---|
4542 | Gives the type of hints used for previous answers. May be one of
|
---|
4543 | C<default>, C<recommended> or C<previous>.
|
---|
4544 |
|
---|
4545 | =item C<hostcat>
|
---|
4546 |
|
---|
4547 | From F<nis.U>:
|
---|
4548 |
|
---|
4549 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the
|
---|
4550 | F</etc/hosts> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/hosts>", but can be
|
---|
4551 | "ypcat hosts" when C<NIS> is used.
|
---|
4552 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent
|
---|
4553 | command, in which case this variable is unset.
|
---|
4554 |
|
---|
4555 | =item C<html1dir>
|
---|
4556 |
|
---|
4557 | From F<html1dir.U>:
|
---|
4558 |
|
---|
4559 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which html
|
---|
4560 | source pages are to be put. This directory is for pages
|
---|
4561 | that describe whole programs, not libraries or modules. It
|
---|
4562 | is intended to correspond roughly to section 1 of the Unix
|
---|
4563 | manuals.
|
---|
4564 |
|
---|
4565 | =item C<html1direxp>
|
---|
4566 |
|
---|
4567 | From F<html1dir.U>:
|
---|
4568 |
|
---|
4569 | This variable is the same as the html1dir variable, but is filename
|
---|
4570 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles.
|
---|
4571 |
|
---|
4572 | =item C<html3dir>
|
---|
4573 |
|
---|
4574 | From F<html3dir.U>:
|
---|
4575 |
|
---|
4576 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which html
|
---|
4577 | source pages are to be put. This directory is for pages
|
---|
4578 | that describe libraries or modules. It is intended to
|
---|
4579 | correspond roughly to section 3 of the Unix manuals.
|
---|
4580 |
|
---|
4581 | =item C<html3direxp>
|
---|
4582 |
|
---|
4583 | From F<html3dir.U>:
|
---|
4584 |
|
---|
4585 | This variable is the same as the html3dir variable, but is filename
|
---|
4586 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles.
|
---|
4587 |
|
---|
4588 | =back
|
---|
4589 |
|
---|
4590 | =head2 i
|
---|
4591 |
|
---|
4592 | =over 4
|
---|
4593 |
|
---|
4594 | =item C<i16size>
|
---|
4595 |
|
---|
4596 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
4597 |
|
---|
4598 | This variable is the size of an I16 in bytes.
|
---|
4599 |
|
---|
4600 | =item C<i16type>
|
---|
4601 |
|
---|
4602 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
4603 |
|
---|
4604 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I16.
|
---|
4605 |
|
---|
4606 | =item C<i32size>
|
---|
4607 |
|
---|
4608 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
4609 |
|
---|
4610 | This variable is the size of an I32 in bytes.
|
---|
4611 |
|
---|
4612 | =item C<i32type>
|
---|
4613 |
|
---|
4614 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
4615 |
|
---|
4616 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I32.
|
---|
4617 |
|
---|
4618 | =item C<i64size>
|
---|
4619 |
|
---|
4620 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
4621 |
|
---|
4622 | This variable is the size of an I64 in bytes.
|
---|
4623 |
|
---|
4624 | =item C<i64type>
|
---|
4625 |
|
---|
4626 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
4627 |
|
---|
4628 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I64.
|
---|
4629 |
|
---|
4630 | =item C<i8size>
|
---|
4631 |
|
---|
4632 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
4633 |
|
---|
4634 | This variable is the size of an I8 in bytes.
|
---|
4635 |
|
---|
4636 | =item C<i8type>
|
---|
4637 |
|
---|
4638 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
4639 |
|
---|
4640 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I8.
|
---|
4641 |
|
---|
4642 | =item C<i_arpainet>
|
---|
4643 |
|
---|
4644 | From F<i_arpainet.U>:
|
---|
4645 |
|
---|
4646 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_ARPA_INET> symbol,
|
---|
4647 | and indicates whether a C program should include <arpa/inet.h>.
|
---|
4648 |
|
---|
4649 | =item C<i_bsdioctl>
|
---|
4650 |
|
---|
4651 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>:
|
---|
4652 |
|
---|
4653 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_BSDIOCTL> symbol, which
|
---|
4654 | indicates to the C program that <sys/bsdioctl.h> exists and should
|
---|
4655 | be included.
|
---|
4656 |
|
---|
4657 | =item C<i_crypt>
|
---|
4658 |
|
---|
4659 | From F<i_crypt.U>:
|
---|
4660 |
|
---|
4661 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_CRYPT> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4662 | whether a C program should include <crypt.h>.
|
---|
4663 |
|
---|
4664 | =item C<i_db>
|
---|
4665 |
|
---|
4666 | From F<i_db.U>:
|
---|
4667 |
|
---|
4668 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DB> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4669 | whether a C program may include Berkeley's C<DB> include file <db.h>.
|
---|
4670 |
|
---|
4671 | =item C<i_dbm>
|
---|
4672 |
|
---|
4673 | From F<i_dbm.U>:
|
---|
4674 |
|
---|
4675 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DBM> symbol, which
|
---|
4676 | indicates to the C program that <dbm.h> exists and should
|
---|
4677 | be included.
|
---|
4678 |
|
---|
4679 | =item C<i_dirent>
|
---|
4680 |
|
---|
4681 | From F<i_dirent.U>:
|
---|
4682 |
|
---|
4683 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_DIRENT>, which indicates
|
---|
4684 | to the C program that it should include <dirent.h>.
|
---|
4685 |
|
---|
4686 | =item C<i_dld>
|
---|
4687 |
|
---|
4688 | From F<i_dld.U>:
|
---|
4689 |
|
---|
4690 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DLD> symbol, which
|
---|
4691 | indicates to the C program that <dld.h> (C<GNU> dynamic loading)
|
---|
4692 | exists and should be included.
|
---|
4693 |
|
---|
4694 | =item C<i_dlfcn>
|
---|
4695 |
|
---|
4696 | From F<i_dlfcn.U>:
|
---|
4697 |
|
---|
4698 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DLFCN> symbol, which
|
---|
4699 | indicates to the C program that <dlfcn.h> exists and should
|
---|
4700 | be included.
|
---|
4701 |
|
---|
4702 | =item C<i_fcntl>
|
---|
4703 |
|
---|
4704 | From F<i_fcntl.U>:
|
---|
4705 |
|
---|
4706 | This variable controls the value of C<I_FCNTL> (which tells
|
---|
4707 | the C program to include <fcntl.h>).
|
---|
4708 |
|
---|
4709 | =item C<i_float>
|
---|
4710 |
|
---|
4711 | From F<i_float.U>:
|
---|
4712 |
|
---|
4713 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FLOAT> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4714 | whether a C program may include <float.h> to get symbols like C<DBL_MAX>
|
---|
4715 | or C<DBL_MIN>, F<i.e>. machine dependent floating point values.
|
---|
4716 |
|
---|
4717 | =item C<i_fp>
|
---|
4718 |
|
---|
4719 | From F<i_fp.U>:
|
---|
4720 |
|
---|
4721 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FP> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4722 | whether a C program should include <fp.h>.
|
---|
4723 |
|
---|
4724 | =item C<i_fp_class>
|
---|
4725 |
|
---|
4726 | From F<i_fp_class.U>:
|
---|
4727 |
|
---|
4728 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FP_CLASS> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4729 | whether a C program should include <fp_class.h>.
|
---|
4730 |
|
---|
4731 | =item C<i_gdbm>
|
---|
4732 |
|
---|
4733 | From F<i_gdbm.U>:
|
---|
4734 |
|
---|
4735 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_GDBM> symbol, which
|
---|
4736 | indicates to the C program that <gdbm.h> exists and should
|
---|
4737 | be included.
|
---|
4738 |
|
---|
4739 | =item C<i_grp>
|
---|
4740 |
|
---|
4741 | From F<i_grp.U>:
|
---|
4742 |
|
---|
4743 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_GRP> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4744 | whether a C program should include <grp.h>.
|
---|
4745 |
|
---|
4746 | =item C<i_ieeefp>
|
---|
4747 |
|
---|
4748 | From F<i_ieeefp.U>:
|
---|
4749 |
|
---|
4750 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_IEEEFP> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4751 | whether a C program should include <ieeefp.h>.
|
---|
4752 |
|
---|
4753 | =item C<i_inttypes>
|
---|
4754 |
|
---|
4755 | From F<i_inttypes.U>:
|
---|
4756 |
|
---|
4757 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_INTTYPES> symbol,
|
---|
4758 | and indicates whether a C program should include <inttypes.h>.
|
---|
4759 |
|
---|
4760 | =item C<i_langinfo>
|
---|
4761 |
|
---|
4762 | From F<i_langinfo.U>:
|
---|
4763 |
|
---|
4764 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LANGINFO> symbol,
|
---|
4765 | and indicates whether a C program should include <langinfo.h>.
|
---|
4766 |
|
---|
4767 | =item C<i_libutil>
|
---|
4768 |
|
---|
4769 | From F<i_libutil.U>:
|
---|
4770 |
|
---|
4771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LIBUTIL> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4772 | whether a C program should include <libutil.h>.
|
---|
4773 |
|
---|
4774 | =item C<i_limits>
|
---|
4775 |
|
---|
4776 | From F<i_limits.U>:
|
---|
4777 |
|
---|
4778 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LIMITS> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4779 | whether a C program may include <limits.h> to get symbols like C<WORD_BIT>
|
---|
4780 | and friends.
|
---|
4781 |
|
---|
4782 | =item C<i_locale>
|
---|
4783 |
|
---|
4784 | From F<i_locale.U>:
|
---|
4785 |
|
---|
4786 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LOCALE> symbol,
|
---|
4787 | and indicates whether a C program should include <locale.h>.
|
---|
4788 |
|
---|
4789 | =item C<i_machcthr>
|
---|
4790 |
|
---|
4791 | From F<i_machcthr.U>:
|
---|
4792 |
|
---|
4793 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MACH_CTHREADS> symbol,
|
---|
4794 | and indicates whether a C program should include <mach/cthreads.h>.
|
---|
4795 |
|
---|
4796 | =item C<i_malloc>
|
---|
4797 |
|
---|
4798 | From F<i_malloc.U>:
|
---|
4799 |
|
---|
4800 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MALLOC> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4801 | whether a C program should include <malloc.h>.
|
---|
4802 |
|
---|
4803 | =item C<i_math>
|
---|
4804 |
|
---|
4805 | From F<i_math.U>:
|
---|
4806 |
|
---|
4807 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MATH> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4808 | whether a C program may include <math.h>.
|
---|
4809 |
|
---|
4810 | =item C<i_memory>
|
---|
4811 |
|
---|
4812 | From F<i_memory.U>:
|
---|
4813 |
|
---|
4814 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MEMORY> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4815 | whether a C program should include <memory.h>.
|
---|
4816 |
|
---|
4817 | =item C<i_mntent>
|
---|
4818 |
|
---|
4819 | From F<i_mntent.U>:
|
---|
4820 |
|
---|
4821 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MNTENT> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4822 | whether a C program should include <mntent.h>.
|
---|
4823 |
|
---|
4824 | =item C<i_ndbm>
|
---|
4825 |
|
---|
4826 | From F<i_ndbm.U>:
|
---|
4827 |
|
---|
4828 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NDBM> symbol, which
|
---|
4829 | indicates to the C program that <ndbm.h> exists and should
|
---|
4830 | be included.
|
---|
4831 |
|
---|
4832 | =item C<i_netdb>
|
---|
4833 |
|
---|
4834 | From F<i_netdb.U>:
|
---|
4835 |
|
---|
4836 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NETDB> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4837 | whether a C program should include <netdb.h>.
|
---|
4838 |
|
---|
4839 | =item C<i_neterrno>
|
---|
4840 |
|
---|
4841 | From F<i_neterrno.U>:
|
---|
4842 |
|
---|
4843 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NET_ERRNO> symbol, which
|
---|
4844 | indicates to the C program that <net/errno.h> exists and should
|
---|
4845 | be included.
|
---|
4846 |
|
---|
4847 | =item C<i_netinettcp>
|
---|
4848 |
|
---|
4849 | From F<i_netinettcp.U>:
|
---|
4850 |
|
---|
4851 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NETINET_TCP> symbol,
|
---|
4852 | and indicates whether a C program should include <netinet/tcp.h>.
|
---|
4853 |
|
---|
4854 | =item C<i_niin>
|
---|
4855 |
|
---|
4856 | From F<i_niin.U>:
|
---|
4857 |
|
---|
4858 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_NETINET_IN>, which indicates
|
---|
4859 | to the C program that it should include <netinet/in.h>. Otherwise,
|
---|
4860 | you may try <sys/in.h>.
|
---|
4861 |
|
---|
4862 | =item C<i_poll>
|
---|
4863 |
|
---|
4864 | From F<i_poll.U>:
|
---|
4865 |
|
---|
4866 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_POLL> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4867 | whether a C program should include <poll.h>.
|
---|
4868 |
|
---|
4869 | =item C<i_prot>
|
---|
4870 |
|
---|
4871 | From F<i_prot.U>:
|
---|
4872 |
|
---|
4873 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_PROT> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4874 | whether a C program should include <prot.h>.
|
---|
4875 |
|
---|
4876 | =item C<i_pthread>
|
---|
4877 |
|
---|
4878 | From F<i_pthread.U>:
|
---|
4879 |
|
---|
4880 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_PTHREAD> symbol,
|
---|
4881 | and indicates whether a C program should include <pthread.h>.
|
---|
4882 |
|
---|
4883 | =item C<i_pwd>
|
---|
4884 |
|
---|
4885 | From F<i_pwd.U>:
|
---|
4886 |
|
---|
4887 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_PWD>, which indicates
|
---|
4888 | to the C program that it should include <pwd.h>.
|
---|
4889 |
|
---|
4890 | =item C<i_rpcsvcdbm>
|
---|
4891 |
|
---|
4892 | From F<i_dbm.U>:
|
---|
4893 |
|
---|
4894 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_RPCSVC_DBM> symbol, which
|
---|
4895 | indicates to the C program that <rpcsvc/dbm.h> exists and should
|
---|
4896 | be included. Some System V systems might need this instead of <dbm.h>.
|
---|
4897 |
|
---|
4898 | =item C<i_sfio>
|
---|
4899 |
|
---|
4900 | From F<i_sfio.U>:
|
---|
4901 |
|
---|
4902 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SFIO> symbol,
|
---|
4903 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sfio.h>.
|
---|
4904 |
|
---|
4905 | =item C<i_sgtty>
|
---|
4906 |
|
---|
4907 | From F<i_termio.U>:
|
---|
4908 |
|
---|
4909 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SGTTY> symbol, which
|
---|
4910 | indicates to the C program that it should include <sgtty.h> rather
|
---|
4911 | than <termio.h>.
|
---|
4912 |
|
---|
4913 | =item C<i_shadow>
|
---|
4914 |
|
---|
4915 | From F<i_shadow.U>:
|
---|
4916 |
|
---|
4917 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SHADOW> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4918 | whether a C program should include <shadow.h>.
|
---|
4919 |
|
---|
4920 | =item C<i_socks>
|
---|
4921 |
|
---|
4922 | From F<i_socks.U>:
|
---|
4923 |
|
---|
4924 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SOCKS> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4925 | whether a C program should include <socks.h>.
|
---|
4926 |
|
---|
4927 | =item C<i_stdarg>
|
---|
4928 |
|
---|
4929 | From F<i_varhdr.U>:
|
---|
4930 |
|
---|
4931 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDARG> symbol, which
|
---|
4932 | indicates to the C program that <stdarg.h> exists and should
|
---|
4933 | be included.
|
---|
4934 |
|
---|
4935 | =item C<i_stddef>
|
---|
4936 |
|
---|
4937 | From F<i_stddef.U>:
|
---|
4938 |
|
---|
4939 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDDEF> symbol, which
|
---|
4940 | indicates to the C program that <stddef.h> exists and should
|
---|
4941 | be included.
|
---|
4942 |
|
---|
4943 | =item C<i_stdlib>
|
---|
4944 |
|
---|
4945 | From F<i_stdlib.U>:
|
---|
4946 |
|
---|
4947 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDLIB> symbol, which
|
---|
4948 | indicates to the C program that <stdlib.h> exists and should
|
---|
4949 | be included.
|
---|
4950 |
|
---|
4951 | =item C<i_string>
|
---|
4952 |
|
---|
4953 | From F<i_string.U>:
|
---|
4954 |
|
---|
4955 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STRING> symbol, which
|
---|
4956 | indicates that <string.h> should be included rather than <strings.h>.
|
---|
4957 |
|
---|
4958 | =item C<i_sunmath>
|
---|
4959 |
|
---|
4960 | From F<i_sunmath.U>:
|
---|
4961 |
|
---|
4962 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SUNMATH> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4963 | whether a C program should include <sunmath.h>.
|
---|
4964 |
|
---|
4965 | =item C<i_sysaccess>
|
---|
4966 |
|
---|
4967 | From F<i_sysaccess.U>:
|
---|
4968 |
|
---|
4969 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_ACCESS> symbol,
|
---|
4970 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/access.h>.
|
---|
4971 |
|
---|
4972 | =item C<i_sysdir>
|
---|
4973 |
|
---|
4974 | From F<i_sysdir.U>:
|
---|
4975 |
|
---|
4976 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_DIR> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4977 | whether a C program should include <sys/dir.h>.
|
---|
4978 |
|
---|
4979 | =item C<i_sysfile>
|
---|
4980 |
|
---|
4981 | From F<i_sysfile.U>:
|
---|
4982 |
|
---|
4983 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_FILE> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
4984 | whether a C program should include <sys/file.h> to get C<R_OK> and friends.
|
---|
4985 |
|
---|
4986 | =item C<i_sysfilio>
|
---|
4987 |
|
---|
4988 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>:
|
---|
4989 |
|
---|
4990 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_FILIO> symbol, which
|
---|
4991 | indicates to the C program that <sys/filio.h> exists and should
|
---|
4992 | be included in preference to <sys/ioctl.h>.
|
---|
4993 |
|
---|
4994 | =item C<i_sysin>
|
---|
4995 |
|
---|
4996 | From F<i_niin.U>:
|
---|
4997 |
|
---|
4998 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_IN>, which indicates
|
---|
4999 | to the C program that it should include <sys/in.h> instead of
|
---|
5000 | <netinet/in.h>.
|
---|
5001 |
|
---|
5002 | =item C<i_sysioctl>
|
---|
5003 |
|
---|
5004 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>:
|
---|
5005 |
|
---|
5006 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_IOCTL> symbol, which
|
---|
5007 | indicates to the C program that <sys/ioctl.h> exists and should
|
---|
5008 | be included.
|
---|
5009 |
|
---|
5010 | =item C<i_syslog>
|
---|
5011 |
|
---|
5012 | From F<i_syslog.U>:
|
---|
5013 |
|
---|
5014 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSLOG> symbol,
|
---|
5015 | and indicates whether a C program should include <syslog.h>.
|
---|
5016 |
|
---|
5017 | =item C<i_sysmman>
|
---|
5018 |
|
---|
5019 | From F<i_sysmman.U>:
|
---|
5020 |
|
---|
5021 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_MMAN> symbol, and
|
---|
5022 | indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mman.h>.
|
---|
5023 |
|
---|
5024 | =item C<i_sysmode>
|
---|
5025 |
|
---|
5026 | From F<i_sysmode.U>:
|
---|
5027 |
|
---|
5028 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSMODE> symbol,
|
---|
5029 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mode.h>.
|
---|
5030 |
|
---|
5031 | =item C<i_sysmount>
|
---|
5032 |
|
---|
5033 | From F<i_sysmount.U>:
|
---|
5034 |
|
---|
5035 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSMOUNT> symbol,
|
---|
5036 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mount.h>.
|
---|
5037 |
|
---|
5038 | =item C<i_sysndir>
|
---|
5039 |
|
---|
5040 | From F<i_sysndir.U>:
|
---|
5041 |
|
---|
5042 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_NDIR> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5043 | whether a C program should include <sys/ndir.h>.
|
---|
5044 |
|
---|
5045 | =item C<i_sysparam>
|
---|
5046 |
|
---|
5047 | From F<i_sysparam.U>:
|
---|
5048 |
|
---|
5049 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_PARAM> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5050 | whether a C program should include <sys/param.h>.
|
---|
5051 |
|
---|
5052 | =item C<i_sysresrc>
|
---|
5053 |
|
---|
5054 | From F<i_sysresrc.U>:
|
---|
5055 |
|
---|
5056 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_RESOURCE> symbol,
|
---|
5057 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/resource.h>.
|
---|
5058 |
|
---|
5059 | =item C<i_syssecrt>
|
---|
5060 |
|
---|
5061 | From F<i_syssecrt.U>:
|
---|
5062 |
|
---|
5063 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_SECURITY> symbol,
|
---|
5064 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/security.h>.
|
---|
5065 |
|
---|
5066 | =item C<i_sysselct>
|
---|
5067 |
|
---|
5068 | From F<i_sysselct.U>:
|
---|
5069 |
|
---|
5070 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_SELECT>, which indicates
|
---|
5071 | to the C program that it should include <sys/select.h> in order to
|
---|
5072 | get the definition of struct timeval.
|
---|
5073 |
|
---|
5074 | =item C<i_syssockio>
|
---|
5075 |
|
---|
5076 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>:
|
---|
5077 |
|
---|
5078 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_SOCKIO> to indicate to the
|
---|
5079 | C program that socket ioctl codes may be found in <sys/sockio.h>
|
---|
5080 | instead of <sys/ioctl.h>.
|
---|
5081 |
|
---|
5082 | =item C<i_sysstat>
|
---|
5083 |
|
---|
5084 | From F<i_sysstat.U>:
|
---|
5085 |
|
---|
5086 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_STAT> symbol,
|
---|
5087 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/stat.h>.
|
---|
5088 |
|
---|
5089 | =item C<i_sysstatfs>
|
---|
5090 |
|
---|
5091 | From F<i_sysstatfs.U>:
|
---|
5092 |
|
---|
5093 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSSTATFS> symbol,
|
---|
5094 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/statfs.h>.
|
---|
5095 |
|
---|
5096 | =item C<i_sysstatvfs>
|
---|
5097 |
|
---|
5098 | From F<i_sysstatvfs.U>:
|
---|
5099 |
|
---|
5100 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSSTATVFS> symbol,
|
---|
5101 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/statvfs.h>.
|
---|
5102 |
|
---|
5103 | =item C<i_systime>
|
---|
5104 |
|
---|
5105 | From F<i_time.U>:
|
---|
5106 |
|
---|
5107 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_TIME>, which indicates
|
---|
5108 | to the C program that it should include <sys/time.h>.
|
---|
5109 |
|
---|
5110 | =item C<i_systimek>
|
---|
5111 |
|
---|
5112 | From F<i_time.U>:
|
---|
5113 |
|
---|
5114 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_TIME_KERNEL>, which
|
---|
5115 | indicates to the C program that it should include <sys/time.h>
|
---|
5116 | with C<KERNEL> defined.
|
---|
5117 |
|
---|
5118 | =item C<i_systimes>
|
---|
5119 |
|
---|
5120 | From F<i_systimes.U>:
|
---|
5121 |
|
---|
5122 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_TIMES> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5123 | whether a C program should include <sys/times.h>.
|
---|
5124 |
|
---|
5125 | =item C<i_systypes>
|
---|
5126 |
|
---|
5127 | From F<i_systypes.U>:
|
---|
5128 |
|
---|
5129 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_TYPES> symbol,
|
---|
5130 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/types.h>.
|
---|
5131 |
|
---|
5132 | =item C<i_sysuio>
|
---|
5133 |
|
---|
5134 | From F<i_sysuio.U>:
|
---|
5135 |
|
---|
5136 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSUIO> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5137 | whether a C program should include <sys/uio.h>.
|
---|
5138 |
|
---|
5139 | =item C<i_sysun>
|
---|
5140 |
|
---|
5141 | From F<i_sysun.U>:
|
---|
5142 |
|
---|
5143 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_UN>, which indicates
|
---|
5144 | to the C program that it should include <sys/un.h> to get C<UNIX>
|
---|
5145 | domain socket definitions.
|
---|
5146 |
|
---|
5147 | =item C<i_sysutsname>
|
---|
5148 |
|
---|
5149 | From F<i_sysutsname.U>:
|
---|
5150 |
|
---|
5151 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSUTSNAME> symbol,
|
---|
5152 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/utsname.h>.
|
---|
5153 |
|
---|
5154 | =item C<i_sysvfs>
|
---|
5155 |
|
---|
5156 | From F<i_sysvfs.U>:
|
---|
5157 |
|
---|
5158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSVFS> symbol,
|
---|
5159 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/vfs.h>.
|
---|
5160 |
|
---|
5161 | =item C<i_syswait>
|
---|
5162 |
|
---|
5163 | From F<i_syswait.U>:
|
---|
5164 |
|
---|
5165 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_WAIT>, which indicates
|
---|
5166 | to the C program that it should include <sys/wait.h>.
|
---|
5167 |
|
---|
5168 | =item C<i_termio>
|
---|
5169 |
|
---|
5170 | From F<i_termio.U>:
|
---|
5171 |
|
---|
5172 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_TERMIO> symbol, which
|
---|
5173 | indicates to the C program that it should include <termio.h> rather
|
---|
5174 | than <sgtty.h>.
|
---|
5175 |
|
---|
5176 | =item C<i_termios>
|
---|
5177 |
|
---|
5178 | From F<i_termio.U>:
|
---|
5179 |
|
---|
5180 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_TERMIOS> symbol, which
|
---|
5181 | indicates to the C program that the C<POSIX> <termios.h> file is
|
---|
5182 | to be included.
|
---|
5183 |
|
---|
5184 | =item C<i_time>
|
---|
5185 |
|
---|
5186 | From F<i_time.U>:
|
---|
5187 |
|
---|
5188 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_TIME>, which indicates
|
---|
5189 | to the C program that it should include <time.h>.
|
---|
5190 |
|
---|
5191 | =item C<i_unistd>
|
---|
5192 |
|
---|
5193 | From F<i_unistd.U>:
|
---|
5194 |
|
---|
5195 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_UNISTD> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5196 | whether a C program should include <unistd.h>.
|
---|
5197 |
|
---|
5198 | =item C<i_ustat>
|
---|
5199 |
|
---|
5200 | From F<i_ustat.U>:
|
---|
5201 |
|
---|
5202 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_USTAT> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5203 | whether a C program should include <ustat.h>.
|
---|
5204 |
|
---|
5205 | =item C<i_utime>
|
---|
5206 |
|
---|
5207 | From F<i_utime.U>:
|
---|
5208 |
|
---|
5209 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_UTIME> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5210 | whether a C program should include <utime.h>.
|
---|
5211 |
|
---|
5212 | =item C<i_values>
|
---|
5213 |
|
---|
5214 | From F<i_values.U>:
|
---|
5215 |
|
---|
5216 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_VALUES> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5217 | whether a C program may include <values.h> to get symbols like C<MAXLONG>
|
---|
5218 | and friends.
|
---|
5219 |
|
---|
5220 | =item C<i_varargs>
|
---|
5221 |
|
---|
5222 | From F<i_varhdr.U>:
|
---|
5223 |
|
---|
5224 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_VARARGS>, which indicates
|
---|
5225 | to the C program that it should include <varargs.h>.
|
---|
5226 |
|
---|
5227 | =item C<i_varhdr>
|
---|
5228 |
|
---|
5229 | From F<i_varhdr.U>:
|
---|
5230 |
|
---|
5231 | Contains the name of the header to be included to get va_dcl definition.
|
---|
5232 | Typically one of F<varargs.h> or F<stdarg.h>.
|
---|
5233 |
|
---|
5234 | =item C<i_vfork>
|
---|
5235 |
|
---|
5236 | From F<i_vfork.U>:
|
---|
5237 |
|
---|
5238 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_VFORK> symbol, and indicates
|
---|
5239 | whether a C program should include F<vfork.h>.
|
---|
5240 |
|
---|
5241 | =item C<ignore_versioned_solibs>
|
---|
5242 |
|
---|
5243 | From F<libs.U>:
|
---|
5244 |
|
---|
5245 | This variable should be non-empty if non-versioned shared
|
---|
5246 | libraries (F<libfoo.so.x.y>) are to be ignored (because they
|
---|
5247 | cannot be linked against).
|
---|
5248 |
|
---|
5249 | =item C<inc_version_list>
|
---|
5250 |
|
---|
5251 | From F<inc_version_list.U>:
|
---|
5252 |
|
---|
5253 | This variable specifies the list of subdirectories in over
|
---|
5254 | which F<perl.c>:incpush() and F<lib/lib.pm> will automatically
|
---|
5255 | search when adding directories to @C<INC>. The elements in
|
---|
5256 | the list are separated by spaces. This is only useful
|
---|
5257 | if you have a perl library directory tree structured like the
|
---|
5258 | default one. See C<INSTALL> for how this works. The versioned
|
---|
5259 | site_perl directory was introduced in 5.005, so that is the
|
---|
5260 | lowest possible value.
|
---|
5261 |
|
---|
5262 | =item C<inc_version_list_init>
|
---|
5263 |
|
---|
5264 | From F<inc_version_list.U>:
|
---|
5265 |
|
---|
5266 | This variable holds the same list as inc_version_list, but
|
---|
5267 | each item is enclosed in double quotes and separated by commas,
|
---|
5268 | suitable for use in the C<PERL_INC_VERSION_LIST> initialization.
|
---|
5269 |
|
---|
5270 | =item C<incpath>
|
---|
5271 |
|
---|
5272 | From F<usrinc.U>:
|
---|
5273 |
|
---|
5274 | This variable must preceed the normal include path to get hte
|
---|
5275 | right one, as in F<$F<incpath/usr/include>> or F<$F<incpath/usr/lib>>.
|
---|
5276 | Value can be "" or F</bsd43> on mips.
|
---|
5277 |
|
---|
5278 | =item C<inews>
|
---|
5279 |
|
---|
5280 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5281 |
|
---|
5282 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
5283 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
5284 |
|
---|
5285 | =item C<installarchlib>
|
---|
5286 |
|
---|
5287 | From F<archlib.U>:
|
---|
5288 |
|
---|
5289 | This variable is really the same as archlibexp but may differ on
|
---|
5290 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5291 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5292 |
|
---|
5293 | =item C<installbin>
|
---|
5294 |
|
---|
5295 | From F<bin.U>:
|
---|
5296 |
|
---|
5297 | This variable is the same as binexp unless C<AFS> is running in which case
|
---|
5298 | the user is explicitely prompted for it. This variable should always
|
---|
5299 | be used in your makefiles for maximum portability.
|
---|
5300 |
|
---|
5301 | =item C<installhtml1dir>
|
---|
5302 |
|
---|
5303 | From F<html1dir.U>:
|
---|
5304 |
|
---|
5305 | This variable is really the same as html1direxp, unless you are
|
---|
5306 | using a different installprefix. For extra portability, you
|
---|
5307 | should only use this variable within your makefiles.
|
---|
5308 |
|
---|
5309 | =item C<installhtml3dir>
|
---|
5310 |
|
---|
5311 | From F<html3dir.U>:
|
---|
5312 |
|
---|
5313 | This variable is really the same as html3direxp, unless you are
|
---|
5314 | using a different installprefix. For extra portability, you
|
---|
5315 | should only use this variable within your makefiles.
|
---|
5316 |
|
---|
5317 | =item C<installman1dir>
|
---|
5318 |
|
---|
5319 | From F<man1dir.U>:
|
---|
5320 |
|
---|
5321 | This variable is really the same as man1direxp, unless you are using
|
---|
5322 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas
|
---|
5323 | man1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra
|
---|
5324 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles.
|
---|
5325 |
|
---|
5326 | =item C<installman3dir>
|
---|
5327 |
|
---|
5328 | From F<man3dir.U>:
|
---|
5329 |
|
---|
5330 | This variable is really the same as man3direxp, unless you are using
|
---|
5331 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas
|
---|
5332 | man3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra
|
---|
5333 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles.
|
---|
5334 |
|
---|
5335 | =item C<installprefix>
|
---|
5336 |
|
---|
5337 | From F<installprefix.U>:
|
---|
5338 |
|
---|
5339 | This variable holds the name of the directory below which
|
---|
5340 | "make install" will install the package. For most users, this
|
---|
5341 | is the same as prefix. However, it is useful for
|
---|
5342 | installing the software into a different (usually temporary)
|
---|
5343 | location after which it can be bundled up and moved somehow
|
---|
5344 | to the final location specified by prefix.
|
---|
5345 |
|
---|
5346 | =item C<installprefixexp>
|
---|
5347 |
|
---|
5348 | From F<installprefix.U>:
|
---|
5349 |
|
---|
5350 | This variable holds the full absolute path of installprefix
|
---|
5351 | with all F<~>-expansion done.
|
---|
5352 |
|
---|
5353 | =item C<installprivlib>
|
---|
5354 |
|
---|
5355 | From F<privlib.U>:
|
---|
5356 |
|
---|
5357 | This variable is really the same as privlibexp but may differ on
|
---|
5358 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5359 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5360 |
|
---|
5361 | =item C<installscript>
|
---|
5362 |
|
---|
5363 | From F<scriptdir.U>:
|
---|
5364 |
|
---|
5365 | This variable is usually the same as scriptdirexp, unless you are on
|
---|
5366 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You
|
---|
5367 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability.
|
---|
5368 |
|
---|
5369 | =item C<installsitearch>
|
---|
5370 |
|
---|
5371 | From F<sitearch.U>:
|
---|
5372 |
|
---|
5373 | This variable is really the same as sitearchexp but may differ on
|
---|
5374 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5375 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5376 |
|
---|
5377 | =item C<installsitebin>
|
---|
5378 |
|
---|
5379 | From F<sitebin.U>:
|
---|
5380 |
|
---|
5381 | This variable is usually the same as sitebinexp, unless you are on
|
---|
5382 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You
|
---|
5383 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability.
|
---|
5384 |
|
---|
5385 | =item C<installsitehtml1dir>
|
---|
5386 |
|
---|
5387 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>:
|
---|
5388 |
|
---|
5389 | This variable is really the same as sitehtml1direxp, unless you are using
|
---|
5390 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas
|
---|
5391 | html1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra
|
---|
5392 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles.
|
---|
5393 |
|
---|
5394 | =item C<installsitehtml3dir>
|
---|
5395 |
|
---|
5396 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>:
|
---|
5397 |
|
---|
5398 | This variable is really the same as sitehtml3direxp, unless you are using
|
---|
5399 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas
|
---|
5400 | html3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra
|
---|
5401 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles.
|
---|
5402 |
|
---|
5403 | =item C<installsitelib>
|
---|
5404 |
|
---|
5405 | From F<sitelib.U>:
|
---|
5406 |
|
---|
5407 | This variable is really the same as sitelibexp but may differ on
|
---|
5408 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5409 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5410 |
|
---|
5411 | =item C<installsiteman1dir>
|
---|
5412 |
|
---|
5413 | From F<siteman1dir.U>:
|
---|
5414 |
|
---|
5415 | This variable is really the same as siteman1direxp, unless you are using
|
---|
5416 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas
|
---|
5417 | man1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra
|
---|
5418 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles.
|
---|
5419 |
|
---|
5420 | =item C<installsiteman3dir>
|
---|
5421 |
|
---|
5422 | From F<siteman3dir.U>:
|
---|
5423 |
|
---|
5424 | This variable is really the same as siteman3direxp, unless you are using
|
---|
5425 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas
|
---|
5426 | man3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra
|
---|
5427 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles.
|
---|
5428 |
|
---|
5429 | =item C<installsitescript>
|
---|
5430 |
|
---|
5431 | From F<sitescript.U>:
|
---|
5432 |
|
---|
5433 | This variable is usually the same as sitescriptexp, unless you are on
|
---|
5434 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You
|
---|
5435 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability.
|
---|
5436 |
|
---|
5437 | =item C<installstyle>
|
---|
5438 |
|
---|
5439 | From F<installstyle.U>:
|
---|
5440 |
|
---|
5441 | This variable describes the C<style> of the perl installation.
|
---|
5442 | This is intended to be useful for tools that need to
|
---|
5443 | manipulate entire perl distributions. Perl itself doesn't use
|
---|
5444 | this to find its libraries -- the library directories are
|
---|
5445 | stored directly in F<Config.pm>. Currently, there are only two
|
---|
5446 | styles: C<lib> and F<lib/perl5>. The default library locations
|
---|
5447 | (e.g. privlib, sitelib) are either F<$prefix/lib> or
|
---|
5448 | F<$prefix/lib/perl5>. The former is useful if $prefix is a
|
---|
5449 | directory dedicated to perl (e.g. F</opt/perl>), while the latter
|
---|
5450 | is useful if $prefix is shared by many packages, e.g. if
|
---|
5451 | $prefix=F</usr/local>.
|
---|
5452 |
|
---|
5453 | Unfortunately, while this C<style> variable is used to set
|
---|
5454 | defaults for all three directory hierarchies (core, vendor, and
|
---|
5455 | site), there is no guarantee that the same style is actually
|
---|
5456 | appropriate for all those directories. For example, $prefix
|
---|
5457 | might be F</opt/perl>, but $siteprefix might be F</usr/local>.
|
---|
5458 | (Perhaps, in retrospect, the C<lib> style should never have been
|
---|
5459 | supported, but it did seem like a nice idea at the time.)
|
---|
5460 |
|
---|
5461 | The situation is even less clear for tools such as MakeMaker
|
---|
5462 | that can be used to install additional modules into
|
---|
5463 | non-standard places. For example, if a user intends to install
|
---|
5464 | a module into a private directory (perhaps by setting C<PREFIX> on
|
---|
5465 | the F<Makefile.PL> command line), then there is no reason to
|
---|
5466 | assume that the Configure-time $installstyle setting will be
|
---|
5467 | relevant for that C<PREFIX>.
|
---|
5468 |
|
---|
5469 | This may later be extended to include other information, so
|
---|
5470 | be careful with pattern-matching on the results.
|
---|
5471 |
|
---|
5472 | For compatibility with F<perl5.005> and earlier, the default
|
---|
5473 | setting is based on whether or not $prefix contains the string
|
---|
5474 | C<perl>.
|
---|
5475 |
|
---|
5476 | =item C<installusrbinperl>
|
---|
5477 |
|
---|
5478 | From F<instubperl.U>:
|
---|
5479 |
|
---|
5480 | This variable tells whether Perl should be installed also as
|
---|
5481 | F</usr/bin/perl> in addition to
|
---|
5482 | F<$installbin/perl>
|
---|
5483 |
|
---|
5484 | =item C<installvendorarch>
|
---|
5485 |
|
---|
5486 | From F<vendorarch.U>:
|
---|
5487 |
|
---|
5488 | This variable is really the same as vendorarchexp but may differ on
|
---|
5489 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5490 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5491 |
|
---|
5492 | =item C<installvendorbin>
|
---|
5493 |
|
---|
5494 | From F<vendorbin.U>:
|
---|
5495 |
|
---|
5496 | This variable is really the same as vendorbinexp but may differ on
|
---|
5497 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5498 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5499 |
|
---|
5500 | =item C<installvendorhtml1dir>
|
---|
5501 |
|
---|
5502 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>:
|
---|
5503 |
|
---|
5504 | This variable is really the same as vendorhtml1direxp but may differ on
|
---|
5505 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5506 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5507 |
|
---|
5508 | =item C<installvendorhtml3dir>
|
---|
5509 |
|
---|
5510 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>:
|
---|
5511 |
|
---|
5512 | This variable is really the same as vendorhtml3direxp but may differ on
|
---|
5513 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5514 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5515 |
|
---|
5516 | =item C<installvendorlib>
|
---|
5517 |
|
---|
5518 | From F<vendorlib.U>:
|
---|
5519 |
|
---|
5520 | This variable is really the same as vendorlibexp but may differ on
|
---|
5521 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5522 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5523 |
|
---|
5524 | =item C<installvendorman1dir>
|
---|
5525 |
|
---|
5526 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>:
|
---|
5527 |
|
---|
5528 | This variable is really the same as vendorman1direxp but may differ on
|
---|
5529 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5530 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5531 |
|
---|
5532 | =item C<installvendorman3dir>
|
---|
5533 |
|
---|
5534 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>:
|
---|
5535 |
|
---|
5536 | This variable is really the same as vendorman3direxp but may differ on
|
---|
5537 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5538 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5539 |
|
---|
5540 | =item C<installvendorscript>
|
---|
5541 |
|
---|
5542 | From F<vendorscript.U>:
|
---|
5543 |
|
---|
5544 | This variable is really the same as vendorscriptexp but may differ on
|
---|
5545 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable
|
---|
5546 | should be used in makefiles.
|
---|
5547 |
|
---|
5548 | =item C<intsize>
|
---|
5549 |
|
---|
5550 | From F<intsize.U>:
|
---|
5551 |
|
---|
5552 | This variable contains the value of the C<INTSIZE> symbol, which
|
---|
5553 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in an int.
|
---|
5554 |
|
---|
5555 | =item C<issymlink>
|
---|
5556 |
|
---|
5557 | From F<issymlink.U>:
|
---|
5558 |
|
---|
5559 | This variable holds the test command to test for a symbolic link
|
---|
5560 | (if they are supported). Typical values include C<test -h> and
|
---|
5561 | C<test -L>.
|
---|
5562 |
|
---|
5563 | =item C<ivdformat>
|
---|
5564 |
|
---|
5565 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
5566 |
|
---|
5567 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
5568 | a Perl C<IV> as a signed decimal integer.
|
---|
5569 |
|
---|
5570 | =item C<ivsize>
|
---|
5571 |
|
---|
5572 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
5573 |
|
---|
5574 | This variable is the size of an C<IV> in bytes.
|
---|
5575 |
|
---|
5576 | =item C<ivtype>
|
---|
5577 |
|
---|
5578 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
5579 |
|
---|
5580 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<IV>.
|
---|
5581 |
|
---|
5582 | =back
|
---|
5583 |
|
---|
5584 | =head2 k
|
---|
5585 |
|
---|
5586 | =over 4
|
---|
5587 |
|
---|
5588 | =item C<known_extensions>
|
---|
5589 |
|
---|
5590 | From F<Extensions.U>:
|
---|
5591 |
|
---|
5592 | This variable holds a list of all C<XS> extensions included in
|
---|
5593 | the package.
|
---|
5594 |
|
---|
5595 | =item C<ksh>
|
---|
5596 |
|
---|
5597 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5598 |
|
---|
5599 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
5600 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
5601 |
|
---|
5602 | =back
|
---|
5603 |
|
---|
5604 | =head2 l
|
---|
5605 |
|
---|
5606 | =over 4
|
---|
5607 |
|
---|
5608 | =item C<ld>
|
---|
5609 |
|
---|
5610 | From F<dlsrc.U>:
|
---|
5611 |
|
---|
5612 | This variable indicates the program to be used to link
|
---|
5613 | libraries for dynamic loading. On some systems, it is C<ld>.
|
---|
5614 | On C<ELF> systems, it should be $cc. Mostly, we'll try to respect
|
---|
5615 | the hint file setting.
|
---|
5616 |
|
---|
5617 | =item C<lddlflags>
|
---|
5618 |
|
---|
5619 | From F<dlsrc.U>:
|
---|
5620 |
|
---|
5621 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be
|
---|
5622 | passed to $ld to create a shared library suitable for dynamic
|
---|
5623 | loading. It is up to the makefile to use it. For hpux, it
|
---|
5624 | should be C<-b>. For sunos 4.1, it is empty.
|
---|
5625 |
|
---|
5626 | =item C<ldflags>
|
---|
5627 |
|
---|
5628 | From F<ccflags.U>:
|
---|
5629 |
|
---|
5630 | This variable contains any additional C loader flags desired by
|
---|
5631 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this.
|
---|
5632 |
|
---|
5633 | =item C<ldflags_uselargefiles>
|
---|
5634 |
|
---|
5635 | From F<uselfs.U>:
|
---|
5636 |
|
---|
5637 | This variable contains the loader flags needed by large file builds
|
---|
5638 | and added to ldflags by hints files.
|
---|
5639 |
|
---|
5640 | =item C<ldlibpthname>
|
---|
5641 |
|
---|
5642 | From F<libperl.U>:
|
---|
5643 |
|
---|
5644 | This variable holds the name of the shared library
|
---|
5645 | search path, often C<LD_LIBRARY_PATH>. To get an empty
|
---|
5646 | string, the hints file must set this to C<none>.
|
---|
5647 |
|
---|
5648 | =item C<less>
|
---|
5649 |
|
---|
5650 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5651 |
|
---|
5652 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
5653 | full pathname (if any) of the less program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
5654 | the value is reset to a plain C<less> and is not useful.
|
---|
5655 |
|
---|
5656 | =item C<lib_ext>
|
---|
5657 |
|
---|
5658 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
5659 |
|
---|
5660 | This is an old synonym for _a.
|
---|
5661 |
|
---|
5662 | =item C<libc>
|
---|
5663 |
|
---|
5664 | From F<libc.U>:
|
---|
5665 |
|
---|
5666 | This variable contains the location of the C library.
|
---|
5667 |
|
---|
5668 | =item C<libperl>
|
---|
5669 |
|
---|
5670 | From F<libperl.U>:
|
---|
5671 |
|
---|
5672 | The perl executable is obtained by linking F<perlmain.c> with
|
---|
5673 | libperl, any static extensions (usually just DynaLoader),
|
---|
5674 | and any other libraries needed on this system. libperl
|
---|
5675 | is usually F<libperl.a>, but can also be F<libperl.so.xxx> if
|
---|
5676 | the user wishes to build a perl executable with a shared
|
---|
5677 | library.
|
---|
5678 |
|
---|
5679 | =item C<libpth>
|
---|
5680 |
|
---|
5681 | From F<libpth.U>:
|
---|
5682 |
|
---|
5683 | This variable holds the general path (space-separated) used to find
|
---|
5684 | libraries. It is intended to be used by other units.
|
---|
5685 |
|
---|
5686 | =item C<libs>
|
---|
5687 |
|
---|
5688 | From F<libs.U>:
|
---|
5689 |
|
---|
5690 | This variable holds the additional libraries we want to use.
|
---|
5691 | It is up to the Makefile to deal with it. The list can be empty.
|
---|
5692 |
|
---|
5693 | =item C<libsdirs>
|
---|
5694 |
|
---|
5695 | From F<libs.U>:
|
---|
5696 |
|
---|
5697 | This variable holds the directory names aka dirnames of the libraries
|
---|
5698 | we found and accepted, duplicates are removed.
|
---|
5699 |
|
---|
5700 | =item C<libsfiles>
|
---|
5701 |
|
---|
5702 | From F<libs.U>:
|
---|
5703 |
|
---|
5704 | This variable holds the filenames aka basenames of the libraries
|
---|
5705 | we found and accepted.
|
---|
5706 |
|
---|
5707 | =item C<libsfound>
|
---|
5708 |
|
---|
5709 | From F<libs.U>:
|
---|
5710 |
|
---|
5711 | This variable holds the full pathnames of the libraries
|
---|
5712 | we found and accepted.
|
---|
5713 |
|
---|
5714 | =item C<libspath>
|
---|
5715 |
|
---|
5716 | From F<libs.U>:
|
---|
5717 |
|
---|
5718 | This variable holds the directory names probed for libraries.
|
---|
5719 |
|
---|
5720 | =item C<libswanted>
|
---|
5721 |
|
---|
5722 | From F<Myinit.U>:
|
---|
5723 |
|
---|
5724 | This variable holds a list of all the libraries we want to
|
---|
5725 | search. The order is chosen to pick up the c library
|
---|
5726 | ahead of ucb or bsd libraries for SVR4.
|
---|
5727 |
|
---|
5728 | =item C<libswanted_uselargefiles>
|
---|
5729 |
|
---|
5730 | From F<uselfs.U>:
|
---|
5731 |
|
---|
5732 | This variable contains the libraries needed by large file builds
|
---|
5733 | and added to ldflags by hints files. It is a space separated list
|
---|
5734 | of the library names without the C<lib> prefix or any suffix, just
|
---|
5735 | like F<libswanted.>.
|
---|
5736 |
|
---|
5737 | =item C<line>
|
---|
5738 |
|
---|
5739 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5740 |
|
---|
5741 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
5742 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
5743 |
|
---|
5744 | =item C<lint>
|
---|
5745 |
|
---|
5746 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5747 |
|
---|
5748 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
5749 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
5750 |
|
---|
5751 | =item C<lkflags>
|
---|
5752 |
|
---|
5753 | From F<ccflags.U>:
|
---|
5754 |
|
---|
5755 | This variable contains any additional C partial linker flags desired by
|
---|
5756 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this.
|
---|
5757 |
|
---|
5758 | =item C<ln>
|
---|
5759 |
|
---|
5760 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5761 |
|
---|
5762 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
5763 | full pathname (if any) of the ln program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
5764 | the value is reset to a plain C<ln> and is not useful.
|
---|
5765 |
|
---|
5766 | =item C<lns>
|
---|
5767 |
|
---|
5768 | From F<lns.U>:
|
---|
5769 |
|
---|
5770 | This variable holds the name of the command to make
|
---|
5771 | symbolic links (if they are supported). It can be used
|
---|
5772 | in the Makefile. It is either C<ln -s> or C<ln>
|
---|
5773 |
|
---|
5774 | =item C<localtime_r_proto>
|
---|
5775 |
|
---|
5776 | From F<d_localtime_r.U>:
|
---|
5777 |
|
---|
5778 | This variable encodes the prototype of localtime_r.
|
---|
5779 | It is zero if d_localtime_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
5780 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_localtime_r
|
---|
5781 | is defined.
|
---|
5782 |
|
---|
5783 | =item C<locincpth>
|
---|
5784 |
|
---|
5785 | From F<ccflags.U>:
|
---|
5786 |
|
---|
5787 | This variable contains a list of additional directories to be
|
---|
5788 | searched by the compiler. The appropriate C<-I> directives will
|
---|
5789 | be added to ccflags. This is intended to simplify setting
|
---|
5790 | local directories from the Configure command line.
|
---|
5791 | It's not much, but it parallels the loclibpth stuff in F<libpth.U>.
|
---|
5792 |
|
---|
5793 | =item C<loclibpth>
|
---|
5794 |
|
---|
5795 | From F<libpth.U>:
|
---|
5796 |
|
---|
5797 | This variable holds the paths (space-separated) used to find local
|
---|
5798 | libraries. It is prepended to libpth, and is intended to be easily
|
---|
5799 | set from the command line.
|
---|
5800 |
|
---|
5801 | =item C<longdblsize>
|
---|
5802 |
|
---|
5803 | From F<d_longdbl.U>:
|
---|
5804 |
|
---|
5805 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONG_DOUBLESIZE> symbol, which
|
---|
5806 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long double,
|
---|
5807 | if this system supports long doubles.
|
---|
5808 |
|
---|
5809 | =item C<longlongsize>
|
---|
5810 |
|
---|
5811 | From F<d_longlong.U>:
|
---|
5812 |
|
---|
5813 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONGLONGSIZE> symbol, which
|
---|
5814 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long long,
|
---|
5815 | if this system supports long long.
|
---|
5816 |
|
---|
5817 | =item C<longsize>
|
---|
5818 |
|
---|
5819 | From F<intsize.U>:
|
---|
5820 |
|
---|
5821 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONGSIZE> symbol, which
|
---|
5822 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long.
|
---|
5823 |
|
---|
5824 | =item C<lp>
|
---|
5825 |
|
---|
5826 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5827 |
|
---|
5828 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
5829 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
5830 |
|
---|
5831 | =item C<lpr>
|
---|
5832 |
|
---|
5833 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5834 |
|
---|
5835 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
5836 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
5837 |
|
---|
5838 | =item C<ls>
|
---|
5839 |
|
---|
5840 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5841 |
|
---|
5842 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
5843 | full pathname (if any) of the ls program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
5844 | the value is reset to a plain C<ls> and is not useful.
|
---|
5845 |
|
---|
5846 | =item C<lseeksize>
|
---|
5847 |
|
---|
5848 | From F<lseektype.U>:
|
---|
5849 |
|
---|
5850 | This variable defines lseektype to be something like off_t, long,
|
---|
5851 | or whatever type is used to declare lseek offset's type in the
|
---|
5852 | kernel (which also appears to be lseek's return type).
|
---|
5853 |
|
---|
5854 | =item C<lseektype>
|
---|
5855 |
|
---|
5856 | From F<lseektype.U>:
|
---|
5857 |
|
---|
5858 | This variable defines lseektype to be something like off_t, long,
|
---|
5859 | or whatever type is used to declare lseek offset's type in the
|
---|
5860 | kernel (which also appears to be lseek's return type).
|
---|
5861 |
|
---|
5862 | =back
|
---|
5863 |
|
---|
5864 | =head2 m
|
---|
5865 |
|
---|
5866 | =over 4
|
---|
5867 |
|
---|
5868 | =item C<mail>
|
---|
5869 |
|
---|
5870 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5871 |
|
---|
5872 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
5873 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
5874 |
|
---|
5875 | =item C<mailx>
|
---|
5876 |
|
---|
5877 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5878 |
|
---|
5879 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
5880 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
5881 |
|
---|
5882 | =item C<make>
|
---|
5883 |
|
---|
5884 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5885 |
|
---|
5886 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
5887 | full pathname (if any) of the make program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
5888 | the value is reset to a plain C<make> and is not useful.
|
---|
5889 |
|
---|
5890 | =item C<make_set_make>
|
---|
5891 |
|
---|
5892 | From F<make.U>:
|
---|
5893 |
|
---|
5894 | Some versions of C<make> set the variable C<MAKE>. Others do not.
|
---|
5895 | This variable contains the string to be included in F<Makefile.SH>
|
---|
5896 | so that C<MAKE> is set if needed, and not if not needed.
|
---|
5897 | Possible values are:
|
---|
5898 |
|
---|
5899 | make_set_make=C<#> # If your make program handles this for you,
|
---|
5900 |
|
---|
5901 | make_set_make=C<MAKE=$make> # if it doesn't.
|
---|
5902 |
|
---|
5903 | This uses a comment character to distinguish a
|
---|
5904 | C<set> value (from a previous F<config.sh> or Configure C<-D> option)
|
---|
5905 | from an uncomputed value.
|
---|
5906 |
|
---|
5907 | =item C<mallocobj>
|
---|
5908 |
|
---|
5909 | From F<mallocsrc.U>:
|
---|
5910 |
|
---|
5911 | This variable contains the name of the F<malloc.o> that this package
|
---|
5912 | generates, if that F<malloc.o> is preferred over the system malloc.
|
---|
5913 | Otherwise the value is null. This variable is intended for generating
|
---|
5914 | Makefiles. See mallocsrc.
|
---|
5915 |
|
---|
5916 | =item C<mallocsrc>
|
---|
5917 |
|
---|
5918 | From F<mallocsrc.U>:
|
---|
5919 |
|
---|
5920 | This variable contains the name of the F<malloc.c> that comes with
|
---|
5921 | the package, if that F<malloc.c> is preferred over the system malloc.
|
---|
5922 | Otherwise the value is null. This variable is intended for generating
|
---|
5923 | Makefiles.
|
---|
5924 |
|
---|
5925 | =item C<malloctype>
|
---|
5926 |
|
---|
5927 | From F<mallocsrc.U>:
|
---|
5928 |
|
---|
5929 | This variable contains the kind of ptr returned by malloc and realloc.
|
---|
5930 |
|
---|
5931 | =item C<man1dir>
|
---|
5932 |
|
---|
5933 | From F<man1dir.U>:
|
---|
5934 |
|
---|
5935 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which manual
|
---|
5936 | source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the
|
---|
5937 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command.
|
---|
5938 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself.
|
---|
5939 |
|
---|
5940 | =item C<man1direxp>
|
---|
5941 |
|
---|
5942 | From F<man1dir.U>:
|
---|
5943 |
|
---|
5944 | This variable is the same as the man1dir variable, but is filename
|
---|
5945 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles.
|
---|
5946 |
|
---|
5947 | =item C<man1ext>
|
---|
5948 |
|
---|
5949 | From F<man1dir.U>:
|
---|
5950 |
|
---|
5951 | This variable contains the extension that the manual page should
|
---|
5952 | have: one of C<n>, C<l>, or C<1>. The Makefile must supply the F<.>.
|
---|
5953 | See man1dir.
|
---|
5954 |
|
---|
5955 | =item C<man3dir>
|
---|
5956 |
|
---|
5957 | From F<man3dir.U>:
|
---|
5958 |
|
---|
5959 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which manual
|
---|
5960 | source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the
|
---|
5961 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command.
|
---|
5962 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself.
|
---|
5963 |
|
---|
5964 | =item C<man3direxp>
|
---|
5965 |
|
---|
5966 | From F<man3dir.U>:
|
---|
5967 |
|
---|
5968 | This variable is the same as the man3dir variable, but is filename
|
---|
5969 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles.
|
---|
5970 |
|
---|
5971 | =item C<man3ext>
|
---|
5972 |
|
---|
5973 | From F<man3dir.U>:
|
---|
5974 |
|
---|
5975 | This variable contains the extension that the manual page should
|
---|
5976 | have: one of C<n>, C<l>, or C<3>. The Makefile must supply the F<.>.
|
---|
5977 | See man3dir.
|
---|
5978 |
|
---|
5979 | =back
|
---|
5980 |
|
---|
5981 | =head2 M
|
---|
5982 |
|
---|
5983 | =over 4
|
---|
5984 |
|
---|
5985 | =item C<Mcc>
|
---|
5986 |
|
---|
5987 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
5988 |
|
---|
5989 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
5990 | full pathname (if any) of the Mcc program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
5991 | the value is reset to a plain C<Mcc> and is not useful.
|
---|
5992 |
|
---|
5993 | =item C<mips_type>
|
---|
5994 |
|
---|
5995 | From F<usrinc.U>:
|
---|
5996 |
|
---|
5997 | This variable holds the environment type for the mips system.
|
---|
5998 | Possible values are "BSD 4.3" and "System V".
|
---|
5999 |
|
---|
6000 | =item C<mistrustnm>
|
---|
6001 |
|
---|
6002 | From F<Csym.U>:
|
---|
6003 |
|
---|
6004 | This variable can be used to establish a fallthrough for the cases
|
---|
6005 | where nm fails to find a symbol. If usenm is false or usenm is true
|
---|
6006 | and mistrustnm is false, this variable has no effect. If usenm is true
|
---|
6007 | and mistrustnm is C<compile>, a test program will be compiled to try to
|
---|
6008 | find any symbol that can't be located via nm lookup. If mistrustnm is
|
---|
6009 | C<run>, the test program will be run as well as being compiled.
|
---|
6010 |
|
---|
6011 | =item C<mkdir>
|
---|
6012 |
|
---|
6013 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6014 |
|
---|
6015 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
6016 | full pathname (if any) of the mkdir program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
6017 | the value is reset to a plain C<mkdir> and is not useful.
|
---|
6018 |
|
---|
6019 | =item C<mmaptype>
|
---|
6020 |
|
---|
6021 | From F<d_mmap.U>:
|
---|
6022 |
|
---|
6023 | This symbol contains the type of pointer returned by mmap()
|
---|
6024 | (and simultaneously the type of the first argument).
|
---|
6025 | It can be C<void *> or C<caddr_t>.
|
---|
6026 |
|
---|
6027 | =item C<modetype>
|
---|
6028 |
|
---|
6029 | From F<modetype.U>:
|
---|
6030 |
|
---|
6031 | This variable defines modetype to be something like mode_t,
|
---|
6032 | int, unsigned short, or whatever type is used to declare file
|
---|
6033 | modes for system calls.
|
---|
6034 |
|
---|
6035 | =item C<more>
|
---|
6036 |
|
---|
6037 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6038 |
|
---|
6039 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
6040 | full pathname (if any) of the more program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
6041 | the value is reset to a plain C<more> and is not useful.
|
---|
6042 |
|
---|
6043 | =item C<multiarch>
|
---|
6044 |
|
---|
6045 | From F<multiarch.U>:
|
---|
6046 |
|
---|
6047 | This variable conditionally defines the C<MULTIARCH> symbol
|
---|
6048 | which signifies the presence of multiplatform files.
|
---|
6049 | This is normally set by hints files.
|
---|
6050 |
|
---|
6051 | =item C<mv>
|
---|
6052 |
|
---|
6053 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6054 |
|
---|
6055 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
6056 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
6057 |
|
---|
6058 | =item C<myarchname>
|
---|
6059 |
|
---|
6060 | From F<archname.U>:
|
---|
6061 |
|
---|
6062 | This variable holds the architecture name computed by Configure in
|
---|
6063 | a previous run. It is not intended to be perused by any user and
|
---|
6064 | should never be set in a hint file.
|
---|
6065 |
|
---|
6066 | =item C<mydomain>
|
---|
6067 |
|
---|
6068 | From F<myhostname.U>:
|
---|
6069 |
|
---|
6070 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<MYDOMAIN> symbol,
|
---|
6071 | which is the domain of the host the program is going to run on.
|
---|
6072 | The domain must be appended to myhostname to form a complete host name.
|
---|
6073 | The dot comes with mydomain, and need not be supplied by the program.
|
---|
6074 |
|
---|
6075 | =item C<myhostname>
|
---|
6076 |
|
---|
6077 | From F<myhostname.U>:
|
---|
6078 |
|
---|
6079 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<MYHOSTNAME> symbol,
|
---|
6080 | which is the name of the host the program is going to run on.
|
---|
6081 | The domain is not kept with hostname, but must be gotten from mydomain.
|
---|
6082 | The dot comes with mydomain, and need not be supplied by the program.
|
---|
6083 |
|
---|
6084 | =item C<myuname>
|
---|
6085 |
|
---|
6086 | From F<Oldconfig.U>:
|
---|
6087 |
|
---|
6088 | The output of C<uname -a> if available, otherwise the hostname. On Xenix,
|
---|
6089 | pseudo variables assignments in the output are stripped, thank you. The
|
---|
6090 | whole thing is then lower-cased.
|
---|
6091 |
|
---|
6092 | =back
|
---|
6093 |
|
---|
6094 | =head2 n
|
---|
6095 |
|
---|
6096 | =over 4
|
---|
6097 |
|
---|
6098 | =item C<n>
|
---|
6099 |
|
---|
6100 | From F<n.U>:
|
---|
6101 |
|
---|
6102 | This variable contains the C<-n> flag if that is what causes the echo
|
---|
6103 | command to suppress newline. Otherwise it is null. Correct usage is
|
---|
6104 | $echo $n "prompt for a question: $c".
|
---|
6105 |
|
---|
6106 | =item C<need_va_copy>
|
---|
6107 |
|
---|
6108 | From F<need_va_copy.U>:
|
---|
6109 |
|
---|
6110 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the system stores
|
---|
6111 | the variable argument list datatype, va_list, in a format
|
---|
6112 | that cannot be copied by simple assignment, so that some
|
---|
6113 | other means must be used when copying is required.
|
---|
6114 | As such systems vary in their provision (or non-provision)
|
---|
6115 | of copying mechanisms, F<handy.h> defines a platform-
|
---|
6116 | C<independent> macro, Perl_va_copy(src, dst), to do the job.
|
---|
6117 |
|
---|
6118 | =item C<netdb_hlen_type>
|
---|
6119 |
|
---|
6120 | From F<netdbtype.U>:
|
---|
6121 |
|
---|
6122 | This variable holds the type used for the 2nd argument to
|
---|
6123 | gethostbyaddr(). Usually, this is int or size_t or unsigned.
|
---|
6124 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyaddr(), naturally.
|
---|
6125 |
|
---|
6126 | =item C<netdb_host_type>
|
---|
6127 |
|
---|
6128 | From F<netdbtype.U>:
|
---|
6129 |
|
---|
6130 | This variable holds the type used for the 1st argument to
|
---|
6131 | gethostbyaddr(). Usually, this is char * or void *, possibly
|
---|
6132 | with or without a const prefix.
|
---|
6133 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyaddr(), naturally.
|
---|
6134 |
|
---|
6135 | =item C<netdb_name_type>
|
---|
6136 |
|
---|
6137 | From F<netdbtype.U>:
|
---|
6138 |
|
---|
6139 | This variable holds the type used for the argument to
|
---|
6140 | gethostbyname(). Usually, this is char * or const char *.
|
---|
6141 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyname(), naturally.
|
---|
6142 |
|
---|
6143 | =item C<netdb_net_type>
|
---|
6144 |
|
---|
6145 | From F<netdbtype.U>:
|
---|
6146 |
|
---|
6147 | This variable holds the type used for the 1st argument to
|
---|
6148 | getnetbyaddr(). Usually, this is int or long.
|
---|
6149 | This is only useful if you have getnetbyaddr(), naturally.
|
---|
6150 |
|
---|
6151 | =item C<nm>
|
---|
6152 |
|
---|
6153 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6154 |
|
---|
6155 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
6156 | full pathname (if any) of the nm program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
6157 | the value is reset to a plain C<nm> and is not useful.
|
---|
6158 |
|
---|
6159 | =item C<nm_opt>
|
---|
6160 |
|
---|
6161 | From F<usenm.U>:
|
---|
6162 |
|
---|
6163 | This variable holds the options that may be necessary for nm.
|
---|
6164 |
|
---|
6165 | =item C<nm_so_opt>
|
---|
6166 |
|
---|
6167 | From F<usenm.U>:
|
---|
6168 |
|
---|
6169 | This variable holds the options that may be necessary for nm
|
---|
6170 | to work on a shared library but that can not be used on an
|
---|
6171 | archive library. Currently, this is only used by Linux, where
|
---|
6172 | nm --dynamic is *required* to get symbols from an C<ELF> library which
|
---|
6173 | has been stripped, but nm --dynamic is *fatal* on an archive library.
|
---|
6174 | Maybe Linux should just always set usenm=false.
|
---|
6175 |
|
---|
6176 | =item C<nonxs_ext>
|
---|
6177 |
|
---|
6178 | From F<Extensions.U>:
|
---|
6179 |
|
---|
6180 | This variable holds a list of all non-xs extensions included
|
---|
6181 | in the package. All of them will be built.
|
---|
6182 |
|
---|
6183 | =item C<nroff>
|
---|
6184 |
|
---|
6185 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6186 |
|
---|
6187 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
6188 | full pathname (if any) of the nroff program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
6189 | the value is reset to a plain C<nroff> and is not useful.
|
---|
6190 |
|
---|
6191 | =item C<nv_preserves_uv_bits>
|
---|
6192 |
|
---|
6193 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
6194 |
|
---|
6195 | This variable indicates how many of bits type uvtype
|
---|
6196 | a variable nvtype can preserve.
|
---|
6197 |
|
---|
6198 | =item C<nveformat>
|
---|
6199 |
|
---|
6200 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
6201 |
|
---|
6202 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
6203 | a Perl C<NV> using %e-ish floating point format.
|
---|
6204 |
|
---|
6205 | =item C<nvEUformat>
|
---|
6206 |
|
---|
6207 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
6208 |
|
---|
6209 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
6210 | a Perl C<NV> using %E-ish floating point format.
|
---|
6211 |
|
---|
6212 | =item C<nvfformat>
|
---|
6213 |
|
---|
6214 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
6215 |
|
---|
6216 | This variable confains the format string used for printing
|
---|
6217 | a Perl C<NV> using %f-ish floating point format.
|
---|
6218 |
|
---|
6219 | =item C<nvFUformat>
|
---|
6220 |
|
---|
6221 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
6222 |
|
---|
6223 | This variable confains the format string used for printing
|
---|
6224 | a Perl C<NV> using %F-ish floating point format.
|
---|
6225 |
|
---|
6226 | =item C<nvgformat>
|
---|
6227 |
|
---|
6228 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
6229 |
|
---|
6230 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
6231 | a Perl C<NV> using %g-ish floating point format.
|
---|
6232 |
|
---|
6233 | =item C<nvGUformat>
|
---|
6234 |
|
---|
6235 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
6236 |
|
---|
6237 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
6238 | a Perl C<NV> using %G-ish floating point format.
|
---|
6239 |
|
---|
6240 | =item C<nvsize>
|
---|
6241 |
|
---|
6242 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
6243 |
|
---|
6244 | This variable is the size of an C<NV> in bytes.
|
---|
6245 |
|
---|
6246 | =item C<nvtype>
|
---|
6247 |
|
---|
6248 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
6249 |
|
---|
6250 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<NV>.
|
---|
6251 |
|
---|
6252 | =back
|
---|
6253 |
|
---|
6254 | =head2 o
|
---|
6255 |
|
---|
6256 | =over 4
|
---|
6257 |
|
---|
6258 | =item C<o_nonblock>
|
---|
6259 |
|
---|
6260 | From F<nblock_io.U>:
|
---|
6261 |
|
---|
6262 | This variable bears the symbol value to be used during open() or fcntl()
|
---|
6263 | to turn on non-blocking I/O for a file descriptor. If you wish to switch
|
---|
6264 | between blocking and non-blocking, you may try ioctl(C<FIOSNBIO>) instead,
|
---|
6265 | but that is only supported by some devices.
|
---|
6266 |
|
---|
6267 | =item C<obj_ext>
|
---|
6268 |
|
---|
6269 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
6270 |
|
---|
6271 | This is an old synonym for _o.
|
---|
6272 |
|
---|
6273 | =item C<old_pthread_create_joinable>
|
---|
6274 |
|
---|
6275 | From F<d_pthrattrj.U>:
|
---|
6276 |
|
---|
6277 | This variable defines the constant to use for creating joinable
|
---|
6278 | (aka undetached) pthreads. Unused if F<pthread.h> defines
|
---|
6279 | C<PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE>. If used, possible values are
|
---|
6280 | C<PTHREAD_CREATE_UNDETACHED> and C<__UNDETACHED>.
|
---|
6281 |
|
---|
6282 | =item C<optimize>
|
---|
6283 |
|
---|
6284 | From F<ccflags.U>:
|
---|
6285 |
|
---|
6286 | This variable contains any F<optimizer/debugger> flag that should be used.
|
---|
6287 | It is up to the Makefile to use it.
|
---|
6288 |
|
---|
6289 | =item C<orderlib>
|
---|
6290 |
|
---|
6291 | From F<orderlib.U>:
|
---|
6292 |
|
---|
6293 | This variable is C<true> if the components of libraries must be ordered
|
---|
6294 | (with `lorder $* | tsort`) before placing them in an archive. Set to
|
---|
6295 | C<false> if ranlib or ar can generate random libraries.
|
---|
6296 |
|
---|
6297 | =item C<osname>
|
---|
6298 |
|
---|
6299 | From F<Oldconfig.U>:
|
---|
6300 |
|
---|
6301 | This variable contains the operating system name (e.g. sunos,
|
---|
6302 | solaris, hpux, etc.). It can be useful later on for setting
|
---|
6303 | defaults. Any spaces are replaced with underscores. It is set
|
---|
6304 | to a null string if we can't figure it out.
|
---|
6305 |
|
---|
6306 | =item C<osvers>
|
---|
6307 |
|
---|
6308 | From F<Oldconfig.U>:
|
---|
6309 |
|
---|
6310 | This variable contains the operating system version (e.g.
|
---|
6311 | 4.1.3, 5.2, etc.). It is primarily used for helping select
|
---|
6312 | an appropriate hints file, but might be useful elsewhere for
|
---|
6313 | setting defaults. It is set to '' if we can't figure it out.
|
---|
6314 | We try to be flexible about how much of the version number
|
---|
6315 | to keep, e.g. if 4.1.1, 4.1.2, and 4.1.3 are essentially the
|
---|
6316 | same for this package, hints files might just be F<os_4.0> or
|
---|
6317 | F<os_4.1>, etc., not keeping separate files for each little release.
|
---|
6318 |
|
---|
6319 | =item C<otherlibdirs>
|
---|
6320 |
|
---|
6321 | From F<otherlibdirs.U>:
|
---|
6322 |
|
---|
6323 | This variable contains a colon-separated set of paths for the perl
|
---|
6324 | binary to search for additional library files or modules.
|
---|
6325 | These directories will be tacked to the end of @C<INC>.
|
---|
6326 | Perl will automatically search below each path for version-
|
---|
6327 | and architecture-specific directories. See inc_version_list
|
---|
6328 | for more details.
|
---|
6329 | A value of C< > means C<none> and is used to preserve this value
|
---|
6330 | for the next run through Configure.
|
---|
6331 |
|
---|
6332 | =back
|
---|
6333 |
|
---|
6334 | =head2 p
|
---|
6335 |
|
---|
6336 | =over 4
|
---|
6337 |
|
---|
6338 | =item C<package>
|
---|
6339 |
|
---|
6340 | From F<package.U>:
|
---|
6341 |
|
---|
6342 | This variable contains the name of the package being constructed.
|
---|
6343 | It is primarily intended for the use of later Configure units.
|
---|
6344 |
|
---|
6345 | =item C<pager>
|
---|
6346 |
|
---|
6347 | From F<pager.U>:
|
---|
6348 |
|
---|
6349 | This variable contains the name of the preferred pager on the system.
|
---|
6350 | Usual values are (the full pathnames of) more, less, pg, or cat.
|
---|
6351 |
|
---|
6352 | =item C<passcat>
|
---|
6353 |
|
---|
6354 | From F<nis.U>:
|
---|
6355 |
|
---|
6356 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the
|
---|
6357 | F</etc/passwd> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/passwd>", but can be
|
---|
6358 | "ypcat passwd" when C<NIS> is used.
|
---|
6359 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent
|
---|
6360 | command, in which case this variable is unset.
|
---|
6361 |
|
---|
6362 | =item C<patchlevel>
|
---|
6363 |
|
---|
6364 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
6365 |
|
---|
6366 | The patchlevel level of this package.
|
---|
6367 | The value of patchlevel comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file.
|
---|
6368 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<6>.
|
---|
6369 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_VERSION>.
|
---|
6370 |
|
---|
6371 | =item C<path_sep>
|
---|
6372 |
|
---|
6373 | From F<Unix.U>:
|
---|
6374 |
|
---|
6375 | This is an old synonym for p_ in F<Head.U>, the character
|
---|
6376 | used to separate elements in the command shell search C<PATH>.
|
---|
6377 |
|
---|
6378 | =item C<perl5>
|
---|
6379 |
|
---|
6380 | From F<perl5.U>:
|
---|
6381 |
|
---|
6382 | This variable contains the full path (if any) to a previously
|
---|
6383 | installed F<perl5.005> or later suitable for running the script
|
---|
6384 | to determine inc_version_list.
|
---|
6385 |
|
---|
6386 | =item C<perl>
|
---|
6387 |
|
---|
6388 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6389 |
|
---|
6390 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
6391 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
6392 |
|
---|
6393 | =item C<perl_patchlevel>
|
---|
6394 |
|
---|
6395 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
6396 |
|
---|
6397 | This is the Perl patch level, a numeric change identifier,
|
---|
6398 | as defined by whichever source code maintenance system
|
---|
6399 | is used to maintain the patches; currently Perforce.
|
---|
6400 | It does not correlate with the Perl version numbers or
|
---|
6401 | the maintenance versus development dichotomy except
|
---|
6402 | by also being increasing.
|
---|
6403 |
|
---|
6404 | =back
|
---|
6405 |
|
---|
6406 | =head2 P
|
---|
6407 |
|
---|
6408 | =over 4
|
---|
6409 |
|
---|
6410 | =item C<PERL_REVISION>
|
---|
6411 |
|
---|
6412 | From F<Oldsyms.U>:
|
---|
6413 |
|
---|
6414 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 5.
|
---|
6415 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h>
|
---|
6416 |
|
---|
6417 | =item C<PERL_SUBVERSION>
|
---|
6418 |
|
---|
6419 | From F<Oldsyms.U>:
|
---|
6420 |
|
---|
6421 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 2.
|
---|
6422 | Values greater than 50 represent potentially unstable
|
---|
6423 | development subversions.
|
---|
6424 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h>
|
---|
6425 |
|
---|
6426 | =item C<PERL_VERSION>
|
---|
6427 |
|
---|
6428 | From F<Oldsyms.U>:
|
---|
6429 |
|
---|
6430 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 6.
|
---|
6431 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h>
|
---|
6432 |
|
---|
6433 | =item C<perladmin>
|
---|
6434 |
|
---|
6435 | From F<perladmin.U>:
|
---|
6436 |
|
---|
6437 | Electronic mail address of the perl5 administrator.
|
---|
6438 |
|
---|
6439 | =item C<perllibs>
|
---|
6440 |
|
---|
6441 | From F<End.U>:
|
---|
6442 |
|
---|
6443 | The list of libraries needed by Perl only (any libraries needed
|
---|
6444 | by extensions only will by dropped, if using dynamic loading).
|
---|
6445 |
|
---|
6446 | =item C<perlpath>
|
---|
6447 |
|
---|
6448 | From F<perlpath.U>:
|
---|
6449 |
|
---|
6450 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PERLPATH> symbol,
|
---|
6451 | which contains the name of the perl interpreter to be used in
|
---|
6452 | shell scripts and in the "eval C<exec>" idiom. This variable is
|
---|
6453 | not necessarily the pathname of the file containing the perl
|
---|
6454 | interpreter; you must append the executable extension (_exe) if
|
---|
6455 | it is not already present. Note that Perl code that runs during
|
---|
6456 | the Perl build process cannot reference this variable, as Perl
|
---|
6457 | may not have been installed, or even if installed, may be a
|
---|
6458 | different version of Perl.
|
---|
6459 |
|
---|
6460 | =item C<pg>
|
---|
6461 |
|
---|
6462 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6463 |
|
---|
6464 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
6465 | full pathname (if any) of the pg program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
6466 | the value is reset to a plain C<pg> and is not useful.
|
---|
6467 |
|
---|
6468 | =item C<phostname>
|
---|
6469 |
|
---|
6470 | From F<myhostname.U>:
|
---|
6471 |
|
---|
6472 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PHOSTNAME> symbol,
|
---|
6473 | which is a command that can be fed to popen() to get the host name.
|
---|
6474 | The program should probably not presume that the domain is or isn't
|
---|
6475 | there already.
|
---|
6476 |
|
---|
6477 | =item C<pidtype>
|
---|
6478 |
|
---|
6479 | From F<pidtype.U>:
|
---|
6480 |
|
---|
6481 | This variable defines C<PIDTYPE> to be something like pid_t, int,
|
---|
6482 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare process ids in the kernel.
|
---|
6483 |
|
---|
6484 | =item C<plibpth>
|
---|
6485 |
|
---|
6486 | From F<libpth.U>:
|
---|
6487 |
|
---|
6488 | Holds the private path used by Configure to find out the libraries.
|
---|
6489 | Its value is prepend to libpth. This variable takes care of special
|
---|
6490 | machines, like the mips. Usually, it should be empty.
|
---|
6491 |
|
---|
6492 | =item C<pmake>
|
---|
6493 |
|
---|
6494 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6495 |
|
---|
6496 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
6497 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
6498 |
|
---|
6499 | =item C<pr>
|
---|
6500 |
|
---|
6501 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6502 |
|
---|
6503 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
6504 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
6505 |
|
---|
6506 | =item C<prefix>
|
---|
6507 |
|
---|
6508 | From F<prefix.U>:
|
---|
6509 |
|
---|
6510 | This variable holds the name of the directory below which the
|
---|
6511 | user will install the package. Usually, this is F</usr/local>, and
|
---|
6512 | executables go in F</usr/local/bin>, library stuff in F</usr/local/lib>,
|
---|
6513 | man pages in F</usr/local/man>, etc. It is only used to set defaults
|
---|
6514 | for things in F<bin.U>, F<mansrc.U>, F<privlib.U>, or F<scriptdir.U>.
|
---|
6515 |
|
---|
6516 | =item C<prefixexp>
|
---|
6517 |
|
---|
6518 | From F<prefix.U>:
|
---|
6519 |
|
---|
6520 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below
|
---|
6521 | which the user will install the package. Derived from prefix.
|
---|
6522 |
|
---|
6523 | =item C<privlib>
|
---|
6524 |
|
---|
6525 | From F<privlib.U>:
|
---|
6526 |
|
---|
6527 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PRIVLIB> symbol,
|
---|
6528 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may
|
---|
6529 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create
|
---|
6530 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution).
|
---|
6531 |
|
---|
6532 | =item C<privlibexp>
|
---|
6533 |
|
---|
6534 | From F<privlib.U>:
|
---|
6535 |
|
---|
6536 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of privlib, so that you
|
---|
6537 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
6538 |
|
---|
6539 | =item C<procselfexe>
|
---|
6540 |
|
---|
6541 | From F<d_procselfexe.U>:
|
---|
6542 |
|
---|
6543 | If d_procselfexe is defined, $procselfexe is the filename
|
---|
6544 | of the symbolic link pointing to the absolute pathname of
|
---|
6545 | the executing program.
|
---|
6546 |
|
---|
6547 | =item C<prototype>
|
---|
6548 |
|
---|
6549 | From F<prototype.U>:
|
---|
6550 |
|
---|
6551 | This variable holds the eventual value of C<CAN_PROTOTYPE>, which
|
---|
6552 | indicates the C compiler can handle funciton prototypes.
|
---|
6553 |
|
---|
6554 | =item C<ptrsize>
|
---|
6555 |
|
---|
6556 | From F<ptrsize.U>:
|
---|
6557 |
|
---|
6558 | This variable contains the value of the C<PTRSIZE> symbol, which
|
---|
6559 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a pointer.
|
---|
6560 |
|
---|
6561 | =back
|
---|
6562 |
|
---|
6563 | =head2 q
|
---|
6564 |
|
---|
6565 | =over 4
|
---|
6566 |
|
---|
6567 | =item C<quadkind>
|
---|
6568 |
|
---|
6569 | From F<quadtype.U>:
|
---|
6570 |
|
---|
6571 | This variable, if defined, encodes the type of a quad:
|
---|
6572 | 1 = int, 2 = long, 3 = long long, 4 = int64_t.
|
---|
6573 |
|
---|
6574 | =item C<quadtype>
|
---|
6575 |
|
---|
6576 | From F<quadtype.U>:
|
---|
6577 |
|
---|
6578 | This variable defines Quad_t to be something like long, int,
|
---|
6579 | long long, int64_t, or whatever type is used for 64-bit integers.
|
---|
6580 |
|
---|
6581 | =back
|
---|
6582 |
|
---|
6583 | =head2 r
|
---|
6584 |
|
---|
6585 | =over 4
|
---|
6586 |
|
---|
6587 | =item C<randbits>
|
---|
6588 |
|
---|
6589 | From F<randfunc.U>:
|
---|
6590 |
|
---|
6591 | Indicates how many bits are produced by the function used to
|
---|
6592 | generate normalized random numbers.
|
---|
6593 |
|
---|
6594 | =item C<randfunc>
|
---|
6595 |
|
---|
6596 | From F<randfunc.U>:
|
---|
6597 |
|
---|
6598 | Indicates the name of the random number function to use.
|
---|
6599 | Values include drand48, random, and rand. In C programs,
|
---|
6600 | the C<Drand01> macro is defined to generate uniformly distributed
|
---|
6601 | random numbers over the range [0., 1.[ (see drand01 and nrand).
|
---|
6602 |
|
---|
6603 | =item C<random_r_proto>
|
---|
6604 |
|
---|
6605 | From F<d_random_r.U>:
|
---|
6606 |
|
---|
6607 | This variable encodes the prototype of random_r.
|
---|
6608 | It is zero if d_random_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6609 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_random_r
|
---|
6610 | is defined.
|
---|
6611 |
|
---|
6612 | =item C<randseedtype>
|
---|
6613 |
|
---|
6614 | From F<randfunc.U>:
|
---|
6615 |
|
---|
6616 | Indicates the type of the argument of the seedfunc.
|
---|
6617 |
|
---|
6618 | =item C<ranlib>
|
---|
6619 |
|
---|
6620 | From F<orderlib.U>:
|
---|
6621 |
|
---|
6622 | This variable is set to the pathname of the ranlib program, if it is
|
---|
6623 | needed to generate random libraries. Set to C<:> if ar can generate
|
---|
6624 | random libraries or if random libraries are not supported
|
---|
6625 |
|
---|
6626 | =item C<rd_nodata>
|
---|
6627 |
|
---|
6628 | From F<nblock_io.U>:
|
---|
6629 |
|
---|
6630 | This variable holds the return code from read() when no data is
|
---|
6631 | present. It should be -1, but some systems return 0 when C<O_NDELAY> is
|
---|
6632 | used, which is a shame because you cannot make the difference between
|
---|
6633 | no data and an F<EOF.>. Sigh!
|
---|
6634 |
|
---|
6635 | =item C<readdir64_r_proto>
|
---|
6636 |
|
---|
6637 | From F<d_readdir64_r.U>:
|
---|
6638 |
|
---|
6639 | This variable encodes the prototype of readdir64_r.
|
---|
6640 | It is zero if d_readdir64_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6641 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_readdir64_r
|
---|
6642 | is defined.
|
---|
6643 |
|
---|
6644 | =item C<readdir_r_proto>
|
---|
6645 |
|
---|
6646 | From F<d_readdir_r.U>:
|
---|
6647 |
|
---|
6648 | This variable encodes the prototype of readdir_r.
|
---|
6649 | It is zero if d_readdir_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6650 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_readdir_r
|
---|
6651 | is defined.
|
---|
6652 |
|
---|
6653 | =item C<revision>
|
---|
6654 |
|
---|
6655 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
6656 |
|
---|
6657 | The value of revision comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file.
|
---|
6658 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<5>.
|
---|
6659 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_REVISION>.
|
---|
6660 |
|
---|
6661 | =item C<rm>
|
---|
6662 |
|
---|
6663 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6664 |
|
---|
6665 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
6666 | full pathname (if any) of the rm program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
6667 | the value is reset to a plain C<rm> and is not useful.
|
---|
6668 |
|
---|
6669 | =item C<rmail>
|
---|
6670 |
|
---|
6671 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6672 |
|
---|
6673 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
6674 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
6675 |
|
---|
6676 | =item C<run>
|
---|
6677 |
|
---|
6678 | From F<Cross.U>:
|
---|
6679 |
|
---|
6680 | This variable contains the command used by Configure
|
---|
6681 | to copy and execute a cross-compiled executable in the
|
---|
6682 | target host. Useful and available only during Perl build.
|
---|
6683 | Empty string '' if not cross-compiling.
|
---|
6684 |
|
---|
6685 | =item C<runnm>
|
---|
6686 |
|
---|
6687 | From F<usenm.U>:
|
---|
6688 |
|
---|
6689 | This variable contains C<true> or C<false> depending whether the
|
---|
6690 | nm extraction should be performed or not, according to the value
|
---|
6691 | of usenm and the flags on the Configure command line.
|
---|
6692 |
|
---|
6693 | =back
|
---|
6694 |
|
---|
6695 | =head2 s
|
---|
6696 |
|
---|
6697 | =over 4
|
---|
6698 |
|
---|
6699 | =item C<sched_yield>
|
---|
6700 |
|
---|
6701 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>:
|
---|
6702 |
|
---|
6703 | This variable defines the way to yield the execution
|
---|
6704 | of the current thread.
|
---|
6705 |
|
---|
6706 | =item C<scriptdir>
|
---|
6707 |
|
---|
6708 | From F<scriptdir.U>:
|
---|
6709 |
|
---|
6710 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants
|
---|
6711 | to put publicly scripts for the package in question. It is either
|
---|
6712 | the same directory as for binaries, or a special one that can be
|
---|
6713 | mounted across different architectures, like F</usr/share>. Programs
|
---|
6714 | must be prepared to deal with F<~name> expansion.
|
---|
6715 |
|
---|
6716 | =item C<scriptdirexp>
|
---|
6717 |
|
---|
6718 | From F<scriptdir.U>:
|
---|
6719 |
|
---|
6720 | This variable is the same as scriptdir, but is filename expanded
|
---|
6721 | at configuration time, for programs not wanting to bother with it.
|
---|
6722 |
|
---|
6723 | =item C<sed>
|
---|
6724 |
|
---|
6725 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6726 |
|
---|
6727 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
6728 | full pathname (if any) of the sed program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
6729 | the value is reset to a plain C<sed> and is not useful.
|
---|
6730 |
|
---|
6731 | =item C<seedfunc>
|
---|
6732 |
|
---|
6733 | From F<randfunc.U>:
|
---|
6734 |
|
---|
6735 | Indicates the random number generating seed function.
|
---|
6736 | Values include srand48, srandom, and srand.
|
---|
6737 |
|
---|
6738 | =item C<selectminbits>
|
---|
6739 |
|
---|
6740 | From F<selectminbits.U>:
|
---|
6741 |
|
---|
6742 | This variable holds the minimum number of bits operated by select.
|
---|
6743 | That is, if you do select(n, ...), how many bits at least will be
|
---|
6744 | cleared in the masks if some activity is detected. Usually this
|
---|
6745 | is either n or 32*ceil(F<n/32>), especially many little-endians do
|
---|
6746 | the latter. This is only useful if you have select(), naturally.
|
---|
6747 |
|
---|
6748 | =item C<selecttype>
|
---|
6749 |
|
---|
6750 | From F<selecttype.U>:
|
---|
6751 |
|
---|
6752 | This variable holds the type used for the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
|
---|
6753 | arguments to select. Usually, this is C<fd_set *>, if C<HAS_FD_SET>
|
---|
6754 | is defined, and C<int *> otherwise. This is only useful if you
|
---|
6755 | have select(), naturally.
|
---|
6756 |
|
---|
6757 | =item C<sendmail>
|
---|
6758 |
|
---|
6759 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6760 |
|
---|
6761 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
6762 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
6763 |
|
---|
6764 | =item C<setgrent_r_proto>
|
---|
6765 |
|
---|
6766 | From F<d_setgrent_r.U>:
|
---|
6767 |
|
---|
6768 | This variable encodes the prototype of setgrent_r.
|
---|
6769 | It is zero if d_setgrent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6770 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setgrent_r
|
---|
6771 | is defined.
|
---|
6772 |
|
---|
6773 | =item C<sethostent_r_proto>
|
---|
6774 |
|
---|
6775 | From F<d_sethostent_r.U>:
|
---|
6776 |
|
---|
6777 | This variable encodes the prototype of sethostent_r.
|
---|
6778 | It is zero if d_sethostent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6779 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_sethostent_r
|
---|
6780 | is defined.
|
---|
6781 |
|
---|
6782 | =item C<setlocale_r_proto>
|
---|
6783 |
|
---|
6784 | From F<d_setlocale_r.U>:
|
---|
6785 |
|
---|
6786 | This variable encodes the prototype of setlocale_r.
|
---|
6787 | It is zero if d_setlocale_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6788 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setlocale_r
|
---|
6789 | is defined.
|
---|
6790 |
|
---|
6791 | =item C<setnetent_r_proto>
|
---|
6792 |
|
---|
6793 | From F<d_setnetent_r.U>:
|
---|
6794 |
|
---|
6795 | This variable encodes the prototype of setnetent_r.
|
---|
6796 | It is zero if d_setnetent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6797 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setnetent_r
|
---|
6798 | is defined.
|
---|
6799 |
|
---|
6800 | =item C<setprotoent_r_proto>
|
---|
6801 |
|
---|
6802 | From F<d_setprotoent_r.U>:
|
---|
6803 |
|
---|
6804 | This variable encodes the prototype of setprotoent_r.
|
---|
6805 | It is zero if d_setprotoent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6806 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setprotoent_r
|
---|
6807 | is defined.
|
---|
6808 |
|
---|
6809 | =item C<setpwent_r_proto>
|
---|
6810 |
|
---|
6811 | From F<d_setpwent_r.U>:
|
---|
6812 |
|
---|
6813 | This variable encodes the prototype of setpwent_r.
|
---|
6814 | It is zero if d_setpwent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6815 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setpwent_r
|
---|
6816 | is defined.
|
---|
6817 |
|
---|
6818 | =item C<setservent_r_proto>
|
---|
6819 |
|
---|
6820 | From F<d_setservent_r.U>:
|
---|
6821 |
|
---|
6822 | This variable encodes the prototype of setservent_r.
|
---|
6823 | It is zero if d_setservent_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
6824 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setservent_r
|
---|
6825 | is defined.
|
---|
6826 |
|
---|
6827 | =item C<sh>
|
---|
6828 |
|
---|
6829 | From F<sh.U>:
|
---|
6830 |
|
---|
6831 | This variable contains the full pathname of the shell used
|
---|
6832 | on this system to execute Bourne shell scripts. Usually, this will be
|
---|
6833 | F</bin/sh>, though it's possible that some systems will have F</bin/ksh>,
|
---|
6834 | F</bin/pdksh>, F</bin/ash>, F</bin/bash>, or even something such as
|
---|
6835 | D:F</bin/sh.exe>.
|
---|
6836 | This unit comes before F<Options.U>, so you can't set sh with a C<-D>
|
---|
6837 | option, though you can override this (and startsh)
|
---|
6838 | with C<-O -Dsh=F</bin/whatever> -Dstartsh=whatever>
|
---|
6839 |
|
---|
6840 | =item C<shar>
|
---|
6841 |
|
---|
6842 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
6843 |
|
---|
6844 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
6845 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
6846 |
|
---|
6847 | =item C<sharpbang>
|
---|
6848 |
|
---|
6849 | From F<spitshell.U>:
|
---|
6850 |
|
---|
6851 | This variable contains the string #! if this system supports that
|
---|
6852 | construct.
|
---|
6853 |
|
---|
6854 | =item C<shmattype>
|
---|
6855 |
|
---|
6856 | From F<d_shmat.U>:
|
---|
6857 |
|
---|
6858 | This symbol contains the type of pointer returned by shmat().
|
---|
6859 | It can be C<void *> or C<char *>.
|
---|
6860 |
|
---|
6861 | =item C<shortsize>
|
---|
6862 |
|
---|
6863 | From F<intsize.U>:
|
---|
6864 |
|
---|
6865 | This variable contains the value of the C<SHORTSIZE> symbol which
|
---|
6866 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a short.
|
---|
6867 |
|
---|
6868 | =item C<shrpenv>
|
---|
6869 |
|
---|
6870 | From F<libperl.U>:
|
---|
6871 |
|
---|
6872 | If the user builds a shared F<libperl.so>, then we need to tell the
|
---|
6873 | C<perl> executable where it will be able to find the installed F<libperl.so>.
|
---|
6874 | One way to do this on some systems is to set the environment variable
|
---|
6875 | C<LD_RUN_PATH> to the directory that will be the final location of the
|
---|
6876 | shared F<libperl.so>. The makefile can use this with something like
|
---|
6877 | $shrpenv $(C<CC>) -o perl F<perlmain.o> $libperl $libs
|
---|
6878 | Typical values are
|
---|
6879 | shrpenv="env C<LD_RUN_PATH>=F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>>"
|
---|
6880 | or
|
---|
6881 | shrpenv=''
|
---|
6882 | See the main perl F<Makefile.SH> for actual working usage.
|
---|
6883 | Alternatively, we might be able to use a command line option such
|
---|
6884 | as -R F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>> (Solaris) or -Wl,-rpath
|
---|
6885 | F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>> (Linux).
|
---|
6886 |
|
---|
6887 | =item C<shsharp>
|
---|
6888 |
|
---|
6889 | From F<spitshell.U>:
|
---|
6890 |
|
---|
6891 | This variable tells further Configure units whether your sh can
|
---|
6892 | handle # comments.
|
---|
6893 |
|
---|
6894 | =item C<sig_count>
|
---|
6895 |
|
---|
6896 | From F<sig_name.U>:
|
---|
6897 |
|
---|
6898 | This variable holds a number larger than the largest valid
|
---|
6899 | signal number. This is usually the same as the C<NSIG> macro.
|
---|
6900 |
|
---|
6901 | =item C<sig_name>
|
---|
6902 |
|
---|
6903 | From F<sig_name.U>:
|
---|
6904 |
|
---|
6905 | This variable holds the signal names, space separated. The leading
|
---|
6906 | C<SIG> in signal name is removed. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list.
|
---|
6907 | This is currently not used, sig_name_init is used instead.
|
---|
6908 |
|
---|
6909 | =item C<sig_name_init>
|
---|
6910 |
|
---|
6911 | From F<sig_name.U>:
|
---|
6912 |
|
---|
6913 | This variable holds the signal names, enclosed in double quotes and
|
---|
6914 | separated by commas, suitable for use in the C<SIG_NAME> definition
|
---|
6915 | below. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list, and the list is
|
---|
6916 | terminated with a plain 0. The leading C<SIG> in signal names
|
---|
6917 | is removed. See sig_num.
|
---|
6918 |
|
---|
6919 | =item C<sig_num>
|
---|
6920 |
|
---|
6921 | From F<sig_name.U>:
|
---|
6922 |
|
---|
6923 | This variable holds the signal numbers, space separated. A C<ZERO> is
|
---|
6924 | prepended to the list (corresponding to the fake C<SIGZERO>).
|
---|
6925 | Those numbers correspond to the value of the signal listed
|
---|
6926 | in the same place within the sig_name list.
|
---|
6927 | This is currently not used, sig_num_init is used instead.
|
---|
6928 |
|
---|
6929 | =item C<sig_num_init>
|
---|
6930 |
|
---|
6931 | From F<sig_name.U>:
|
---|
6932 |
|
---|
6933 | This variable holds the signal numbers, enclosed in double quotes and
|
---|
6934 | separated by commas, suitable for use in the C<SIG_NUM> definition
|
---|
6935 | below. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list, and the list is
|
---|
6936 | terminated with a plain 0.
|
---|
6937 |
|
---|
6938 | =item C<sig_size>
|
---|
6939 |
|
---|
6940 | From F<sig_name.U>:
|
---|
6941 |
|
---|
6942 | This variable contains the number of elements of the sig_name
|
---|
6943 | and sig_num arrays.
|
---|
6944 |
|
---|
6945 | =item C<signal_t>
|
---|
6946 |
|
---|
6947 | From F<d_voidsig.U>:
|
---|
6948 |
|
---|
6949 | This variable holds the type of the signal handler (void or int).
|
---|
6950 |
|
---|
6951 | =item C<sitearch>
|
---|
6952 |
|
---|
6953 | From F<sitearch.U>:
|
---|
6954 |
|
---|
6955 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<SITEARCH> symbol,
|
---|
6956 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may
|
---|
6957 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create
|
---|
6958 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution).
|
---|
6959 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
6960 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local
|
---|
6961 | architecture-dependent modules in this directory with
|
---|
6962 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL>
|
---|
6963 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
6964 |
|
---|
6965 | =item C<sitearchexp>
|
---|
6966 |
|
---|
6967 | From F<sitearch.U>:
|
---|
6968 |
|
---|
6969 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of sitearch, so that you
|
---|
6970 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
6971 |
|
---|
6972 | =item C<sitebin>
|
---|
6973 |
|
---|
6974 | From F<sitebin.U>:
|
---|
6975 |
|
---|
6976 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants
|
---|
6977 | to put add-on publicly executable files for the package in question. It
|
---|
6978 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using
|
---|
6979 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution.
|
---|
6980 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
6981 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local
|
---|
6982 | executables in this directory with
|
---|
6983 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL>
|
---|
6984 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
6985 |
|
---|
6986 | =item C<sitebinexp>
|
---|
6987 |
|
---|
6988 | From F<sitebin.U>:
|
---|
6989 |
|
---|
6990 | This is the same as the sitebin variable, but is filename expanded at
|
---|
6991 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles.
|
---|
6992 |
|
---|
6993 | =item C<sitehtml1dir>
|
---|
6994 |
|
---|
6995 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>:
|
---|
6996 |
|
---|
6997 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific
|
---|
6998 | html source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the
|
---|
6999 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command.
|
---|
7000 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself.
|
---|
7001 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
7002 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local
|
---|
7003 | html pages in this directory with
|
---|
7004 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL>
|
---|
7005 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
7006 |
|
---|
7007 | =item C<sitehtml1direxp>
|
---|
7008 |
|
---|
7009 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>:
|
---|
7010 |
|
---|
7011 | This variable is the same as the sitehtml1dir variable, but is filename
|
---|
7012 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles.
|
---|
7013 |
|
---|
7014 | =item C<sitehtml3dir>
|
---|
7015 |
|
---|
7016 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>:
|
---|
7017 |
|
---|
7018 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific
|
---|
7019 | library html source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the
|
---|
7020 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command.
|
---|
7021 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself.
|
---|
7022 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
7023 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local
|
---|
7024 | library html pages in this directory with
|
---|
7025 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL>
|
---|
7026 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
7027 |
|
---|
7028 | =item C<sitehtml3direxp>
|
---|
7029 |
|
---|
7030 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>:
|
---|
7031 |
|
---|
7032 | This variable is the same as the sitehtml3dir variable, but is filename
|
---|
7033 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles.
|
---|
7034 |
|
---|
7035 | =item C<sitelib>
|
---|
7036 |
|
---|
7037 | From F<sitelib.U>:
|
---|
7038 |
|
---|
7039 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<SITELIB> symbol,
|
---|
7040 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may
|
---|
7041 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create
|
---|
7042 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution).
|
---|
7043 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
7044 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local
|
---|
7045 | architecture-independent modules in this directory with
|
---|
7046 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL>
|
---|
7047 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
7048 |
|
---|
7049 | =item C<sitelib_stem>
|
---|
7050 |
|
---|
7051 | From F<sitelib.U>:
|
---|
7052 |
|
---|
7053 | This variable is $sitelibexp with any trailing version-specific component
|
---|
7054 | removed. The elements in inc_version_list (F<inc_version_list.U>) can
|
---|
7055 | be tacked onto this variable to generate a list of directories to search.
|
---|
7056 |
|
---|
7057 | =item C<sitelibexp>
|
---|
7058 |
|
---|
7059 | From F<sitelib.U>:
|
---|
7060 |
|
---|
7061 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of sitelib, so that you
|
---|
7062 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
7063 |
|
---|
7064 | =item C<siteman1dir>
|
---|
7065 |
|
---|
7066 | From F<siteman1dir.U>:
|
---|
7067 |
|
---|
7068 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific
|
---|
7069 | manual source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the
|
---|
7070 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command.
|
---|
7071 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself.
|
---|
7072 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
7073 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local
|
---|
7074 | man1 pages in this directory with
|
---|
7075 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL>
|
---|
7076 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
7077 |
|
---|
7078 | =item C<siteman1direxp>
|
---|
7079 |
|
---|
7080 | From F<siteman1dir.U>:
|
---|
7081 |
|
---|
7082 | This variable is the same as the siteman1dir variable, but is filename
|
---|
7083 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles.
|
---|
7084 |
|
---|
7085 | =item C<siteman3dir>
|
---|
7086 |
|
---|
7087 | From F<siteman3dir.U>:
|
---|
7088 |
|
---|
7089 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific
|
---|
7090 | library man source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the
|
---|
7091 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command.
|
---|
7092 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself.
|
---|
7093 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
7094 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local
|
---|
7095 | man3 pages in this directory with
|
---|
7096 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL>
|
---|
7097 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
7098 |
|
---|
7099 | =item C<siteman3direxp>
|
---|
7100 |
|
---|
7101 | From F<siteman3dir.U>:
|
---|
7102 |
|
---|
7103 | This variable is the same as the siteman3dir variable, but is filename
|
---|
7104 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles.
|
---|
7105 |
|
---|
7106 | =item C<siteprefix>
|
---|
7107 |
|
---|
7108 | From F<siteprefix.U>:
|
---|
7109 |
|
---|
7110 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below
|
---|
7111 | which the user will install add-on packages.
|
---|
7112 | See C<INSTALL> for usage and examples.
|
---|
7113 |
|
---|
7114 | =item C<siteprefixexp>
|
---|
7115 |
|
---|
7116 | From F<siteprefix.U>:
|
---|
7117 |
|
---|
7118 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below
|
---|
7119 | which the user will install add-on packages. Derived from siteprefix.
|
---|
7120 |
|
---|
7121 | =item C<sitescript>
|
---|
7122 |
|
---|
7123 | From F<sitescript.U>:
|
---|
7124 |
|
---|
7125 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants
|
---|
7126 | to put add-on publicly executable files for the package in question. It
|
---|
7127 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using
|
---|
7128 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution.
|
---|
7129 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
7130 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local
|
---|
7131 | scripts in this directory with
|
---|
7132 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL>
|
---|
7133 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
7134 |
|
---|
7135 | =item C<sitescriptexp>
|
---|
7136 |
|
---|
7137 | From F<sitescript.U>:
|
---|
7138 |
|
---|
7139 | This is the same as the sitescript variable, but is filename expanded at
|
---|
7140 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles.
|
---|
7141 |
|
---|
7142 | =item C<sizesize>
|
---|
7143 |
|
---|
7144 | From F<sizesize.U>:
|
---|
7145 |
|
---|
7146 | This variable contains the size of a sizetype in bytes.
|
---|
7147 |
|
---|
7148 | =item C<sizetype>
|
---|
7149 |
|
---|
7150 | From F<sizetype.U>:
|
---|
7151 |
|
---|
7152 | This variable defines sizetype to be something like size_t,
|
---|
7153 | unsigned long, or whatever type is used to declare length
|
---|
7154 | parameters for string functions.
|
---|
7155 |
|
---|
7156 | =item C<sleep>
|
---|
7157 |
|
---|
7158 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7159 |
|
---|
7160 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7161 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7162 |
|
---|
7163 | =item C<smail>
|
---|
7164 |
|
---|
7165 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7166 |
|
---|
7167 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7168 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7169 |
|
---|
7170 | =item C<so>
|
---|
7171 |
|
---|
7172 | From F<so.U>:
|
---|
7173 |
|
---|
7174 | This variable holds the extension used to identify shared libraries
|
---|
7175 | (also known as shared objects) on the system. Usually set to C<so>.
|
---|
7176 |
|
---|
7177 | =item C<sockethdr>
|
---|
7178 |
|
---|
7179 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
7180 |
|
---|
7181 | This variable has any cpp C<-I> flags needed for socket support.
|
---|
7182 |
|
---|
7183 | =item C<socketlib>
|
---|
7184 |
|
---|
7185 | From F<d_socket.U>:
|
---|
7186 |
|
---|
7187 | This variable has the names of any libraries needed for socket support.
|
---|
7188 |
|
---|
7189 | =item C<socksizetype>
|
---|
7190 |
|
---|
7191 | From F<socksizetype.U>:
|
---|
7192 |
|
---|
7193 | This variable holds the type used for the size argument
|
---|
7194 | for various socket calls like accept. Usual values include
|
---|
7195 | socklen_t, size_t, and int.
|
---|
7196 |
|
---|
7197 | =item C<sort>
|
---|
7198 |
|
---|
7199 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7200 |
|
---|
7201 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
7202 | full pathname (if any) of the sort program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
7203 | the value is reset to a plain C<sort> and is not useful.
|
---|
7204 |
|
---|
7205 | =item C<spackage>
|
---|
7206 |
|
---|
7207 | From F<package.U>:
|
---|
7208 |
|
---|
7209 | This variable contains the name of the package being constructed,
|
---|
7210 | with the first letter uppercased, F<i.e>. suitable for starting
|
---|
7211 | sentences.
|
---|
7212 |
|
---|
7213 | =item C<spitshell>
|
---|
7214 |
|
---|
7215 | From F<spitshell.U>:
|
---|
7216 |
|
---|
7217 | This variable contains the command necessary to spit out a runnable
|
---|
7218 | shell on this system. It is either cat or a grep C<-v> for # comments.
|
---|
7219 |
|
---|
7220 | =item C<sPRId64>
|
---|
7221 |
|
---|
7222 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
7223 |
|
---|
7224 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7225 | format 64-bit decimal numbers (format C<d>) for output.
|
---|
7226 |
|
---|
7227 | =item C<sPRIeldbl>
|
---|
7228 |
|
---|
7229 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
7230 |
|
---|
7231 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7232 | format long doubles (format C<e>) for output.
|
---|
7233 |
|
---|
7234 | =item C<sPRIEUldbl>
|
---|
7235 |
|
---|
7236 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
7237 |
|
---|
7238 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7239 | format long doubles (format C<E>) for output.
|
---|
7240 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIeldbl so that even
|
---|
7241 | case-blind systems can see the difference.
|
---|
7242 |
|
---|
7243 | =item C<sPRIfldbl>
|
---|
7244 |
|
---|
7245 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
7246 |
|
---|
7247 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7248 | format long doubles (format C<f>) for output.
|
---|
7249 |
|
---|
7250 | =item C<sPRIFUldbl>
|
---|
7251 |
|
---|
7252 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
7253 |
|
---|
7254 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7255 | format long doubles (format C<F>) for output.
|
---|
7256 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIfldbl so that even
|
---|
7257 | case-blind systems can see the difference.
|
---|
7258 |
|
---|
7259 | =item C<sPRIgldbl>
|
---|
7260 |
|
---|
7261 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
7262 |
|
---|
7263 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7264 | format long doubles (format C<g>) for output.
|
---|
7265 |
|
---|
7266 | =item C<sPRIGUldbl>
|
---|
7267 |
|
---|
7268 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
7269 |
|
---|
7270 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7271 | format long doubles (format C<G>) for output.
|
---|
7272 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIgldbl so that even
|
---|
7273 | case-blind systems can see the difference.
|
---|
7274 |
|
---|
7275 | =item C<sPRIi64>
|
---|
7276 |
|
---|
7277 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
7278 |
|
---|
7279 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7280 | format 64-bit decimal numbers (format C<i>) for output.
|
---|
7281 |
|
---|
7282 | =item C<sPRIo64>
|
---|
7283 |
|
---|
7284 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
7285 |
|
---|
7286 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7287 | format 64-bit octal numbers (format C<o>) for output.
|
---|
7288 |
|
---|
7289 | =item C<sPRIu64>
|
---|
7290 |
|
---|
7291 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
7292 |
|
---|
7293 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7294 | format 64-bit unsigned decimal numbers (format C<u>) for output.
|
---|
7295 |
|
---|
7296 | =item C<sPRIx64>
|
---|
7297 |
|
---|
7298 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
7299 |
|
---|
7300 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7301 | format 64-bit hexadecimal numbers (format C<x>) for output.
|
---|
7302 |
|
---|
7303 | =item C<sPRIXU64>
|
---|
7304 |
|
---|
7305 | From F<quadfio.U>:
|
---|
7306 |
|
---|
7307 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7308 | format 64-bit hExADECimAl numbers (format C<X>) for output.
|
---|
7309 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIx64 so that even
|
---|
7310 | case-blind systems can see the difference.
|
---|
7311 |
|
---|
7312 | =item C<srand48_r_proto>
|
---|
7313 |
|
---|
7314 | From F<d_srand48_r.U>:
|
---|
7315 |
|
---|
7316 | This variable encodes the prototype of srand48_r.
|
---|
7317 | It is zero if d_srand48_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
7318 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_srand48_r
|
---|
7319 | is defined.
|
---|
7320 |
|
---|
7321 | =item C<srandom_r_proto>
|
---|
7322 |
|
---|
7323 | From F<d_srandom_r.U>:
|
---|
7324 |
|
---|
7325 | This variable encodes the prototype of srandom_r.
|
---|
7326 | It is zero if d_srandom_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
7327 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_srandom_r
|
---|
7328 | is defined.
|
---|
7329 |
|
---|
7330 | =item C<src>
|
---|
7331 |
|
---|
7332 | From F<src.U>:
|
---|
7333 |
|
---|
7334 | This variable holds the path to the package source. It is up to
|
---|
7335 | the Makefile to use this variable and set C<VPATH> accordingly to
|
---|
7336 | find the sources remotely.
|
---|
7337 |
|
---|
7338 | =item C<sSCNfldbl>
|
---|
7339 |
|
---|
7340 | From F<longdblfio.U>:
|
---|
7341 |
|
---|
7342 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to
|
---|
7343 | format long doubles (format C<f>) for input.
|
---|
7344 |
|
---|
7345 | =item C<ssizetype>
|
---|
7346 |
|
---|
7347 | From F<ssizetype.U>:
|
---|
7348 |
|
---|
7349 | This variable defines ssizetype to be something like ssize_t,
|
---|
7350 | long or int. It is used by functions that return a count
|
---|
7351 | of bytes or an error condition. It must be a signed type.
|
---|
7352 | We will pick a type such that sizeof(SSize_t) == sizeof(Size_t).
|
---|
7353 |
|
---|
7354 | =item C<startperl>
|
---|
7355 |
|
---|
7356 | From F<startperl.U>:
|
---|
7357 |
|
---|
7358 | This variable contains the string to put on the front of a perl
|
---|
7359 | script to make sure (hopefully) that it runs with perl and not some
|
---|
7360 | shell. Of course, that leading line must be followed by the classical
|
---|
7361 | perl idiom:
|
---|
7362 | eval 'exec perl -S $0 ${1+C<$@>}'
|
---|
7363 | if $running_under_some_shell;
|
---|
7364 | to guarantee perl startup should the shell execute the script. Note
|
---|
7365 | that this magic incatation is not understood by csh.
|
---|
7366 |
|
---|
7367 | =item C<startsh>
|
---|
7368 |
|
---|
7369 | From F<startsh.U>:
|
---|
7370 |
|
---|
7371 | This variable contains the string to put on the front of a shell
|
---|
7372 | script to make sure (hopefully) that it runs with sh and not some
|
---|
7373 | other shell.
|
---|
7374 |
|
---|
7375 | =item C<static_ext>
|
---|
7376 |
|
---|
7377 | From F<Extensions.U>:
|
---|
7378 |
|
---|
7379 | This variable holds a list of C<XS> extension files we want to
|
---|
7380 | link statically into the package. It is used by Makefile.
|
---|
7381 |
|
---|
7382 | =item C<stdchar>
|
---|
7383 |
|
---|
7384 | From F<stdchar.U>:
|
---|
7385 |
|
---|
7386 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDCHAR> to be the type of char
|
---|
7387 | used in F<stdio.h>. It has the values "unsigned char" or C<char>.
|
---|
7388 |
|
---|
7389 | =item C<stdio_base>
|
---|
7390 |
|
---|
7391 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
7392 |
|
---|
7393 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the
|
---|
7394 | _base field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will
|
---|
7395 | be used to define the macro FILE_base(fp).
|
---|
7396 |
|
---|
7397 | =item C<stdio_bufsiz>
|
---|
7398 |
|
---|
7399 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
7400 |
|
---|
7401 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to determine
|
---|
7402 | the number of bytes store in the I/O buffer pointer to by the
|
---|
7403 | _base field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will
|
---|
7404 | be used to define the macro FILE_bufsiz(fp).
|
---|
7405 |
|
---|
7406 | =item C<stdio_cnt>
|
---|
7407 |
|
---|
7408 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
7409 |
|
---|
7410 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the
|
---|
7411 | _cnt field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will
|
---|
7412 | be used to define the macro FILE_cnt(fp).
|
---|
7413 |
|
---|
7414 | =item C<stdio_filbuf>
|
---|
7415 |
|
---|
7416 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
7417 |
|
---|
7418 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to tell
|
---|
7419 | stdio to refill its internal buffers (?). This will
|
---|
7420 | be used to define the macro FILE_filbuf(fp).
|
---|
7421 |
|
---|
7422 | =item C<stdio_ptr>
|
---|
7423 |
|
---|
7424 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>:
|
---|
7425 |
|
---|
7426 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the
|
---|
7427 | _ptr field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will
|
---|
7428 | be used to define the macro FILE_ptr(fp).
|
---|
7429 |
|
---|
7430 | =item C<stdio_stream_array>
|
---|
7431 |
|
---|
7432 | From F<stdio_streams.U>:
|
---|
7433 |
|
---|
7434 | This variable tells the name of the array holding the stdio streams.
|
---|
7435 | Usual values include _iob, __iob, and __sF.
|
---|
7436 |
|
---|
7437 | =item C<strerror_r_proto>
|
---|
7438 |
|
---|
7439 | From F<d_strerror_r.U>:
|
---|
7440 |
|
---|
7441 | This variable encodes the prototype of strerror_r.
|
---|
7442 | It is zero if d_strerror_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
7443 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_strerror_r
|
---|
7444 | is defined.
|
---|
7445 |
|
---|
7446 | =item C<strings>
|
---|
7447 |
|
---|
7448 | From F<i_string.U>:
|
---|
7449 |
|
---|
7450 | This variable holds the full path of the string header that will be
|
---|
7451 | used. Typically F</usr/include/string.h> or F</usr/include/strings.h>.
|
---|
7452 |
|
---|
7453 | =item C<submit>
|
---|
7454 |
|
---|
7455 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7456 |
|
---|
7457 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7458 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7459 |
|
---|
7460 | =item C<subversion>
|
---|
7461 |
|
---|
7462 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
7463 |
|
---|
7464 | The subversion level of this package.
|
---|
7465 | The value of subversion comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file.
|
---|
7466 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<1>.
|
---|
7467 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_SUBVERSION>.
|
---|
7468 | This is unique to perl.
|
---|
7469 |
|
---|
7470 | =item C<sysman>
|
---|
7471 |
|
---|
7472 | From F<sysman.U>:
|
---|
7473 |
|
---|
7474 | This variable holds the place where the manual is located on this
|
---|
7475 | system. It is not the place where the user wants to put his manual
|
---|
7476 | pages. Rather it is the place where Configure may look to find manual
|
---|
7477 | for unix commands (section 1 of the manual usually). See mansrc.
|
---|
7478 |
|
---|
7479 | =back
|
---|
7480 |
|
---|
7481 | =head2 t
|
---|
7482 |
|
---|
7483 | =over 4
|
---|
7484 |
|
---|
7485 | =item C<tail>
|
---|
7486 |
|
---|
7487 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7488 |
|
---|
7489 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7490 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7491 |
|
---|
7492 | =item C<tar>
|
---|
7493 |
|
---|
7494 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7495 |
|
---|
7496 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7497 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7498 |
|
---|
7499 | =item C<targetarch>
|
---|
7500 |
|
---|
7501 | From F<Cross.U>:
|
---|
7502 |
|
---|
7503 | If cross-compiling, this variable contains the target architecture.
|
---|
7504 | If not, this will be empty.
|
---|
7505 |
|
---|
7506 | =item C<tbl>
|
---|
7507 |
|
---|
7508 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7509 |
|
---|
7510 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7511 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7512 |
|
---|
7513 | =item C<tee>
|
---|
7514 |
|
---|
7515 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7516 |
|
---|
7517 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7518 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7519 |
|
---|
7520 | =item C<test>
|
---|
7521 |
|
---|
7522 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7523 |
|
---|
7524 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
7525 | full pathname (if any) of the test program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
7526 | the value is reset to a plain C<test> and is not useful.
|
---|
7527 |
|
---|
7528 | =item C<timeincl>
|
---|
7529 |
|
---|
7530 | From F<i_time.U>:
|
---|
7531 |
|
---|
7532 | This variable holds the full path of the included time header(s).
|
---|
7533 |
|
---|
7534 | =item C<timetype>
|
---|
7535 |
|
---|
7536 | From F<d_time.U>:
|
---|
7537 |
|
---|
7538 | This variable holds the type returned by time(). It can be long,
|
---|
7539 | or time_t on C<BSD> sites (in which case <sys/types.h> should be
|
---|
7540 | included). Anyway, the type Time_t should be used.
|
---|
7541 |
|
---|
7542 | =item C<tmpnam_r_proto>
|
---|
7543 |
|
---|
7544 | From F<d_tmpnam_r.U>:
|
---|
7545 |
|
---|
7546 | This variable encodes the prototype of tmpnam_r.
|
---|
7547 | It is zero if d_tmpnam_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
7548 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_tmpnam_r
|
---|
7549 | is defined.
|
---|
7550 |
|
---|
7551 | =item C<to>
|
---|
7552 |
|
---|
7553 | From F<Cross.U>:
|
---|
7554 |
|
---|
7555 | This variable contains the command used by Configure
|
---|
7556 | to copy to from the target host. Useful and available
|
---|
7557 | only during Perl build.
|
---|
7558 | The string C<:> if not cross-compiling.
|
---|
7559 |
|
---|
7560 | =item C<touch>
|
---|
7561 |
|
---|
7562 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7563 |
|
---|
7564 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
7565 | full pathname (if any) of the touch program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
7566 | the value is reset to a plain C<touch> and is not useful.
|
---|
7567 |
|
---|
7568 | =item C<tr>
|
---|
7569 |
|
---|
7570 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7571 |
|
---|
7572 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
7573 | full pathname (if any) of the tr program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
7574 | the value is reset to a plain C<tr> and is not useful.
|
---|
7575 |
|
---|
7576 | =item C<trnl>
|
---|
7577 |
|
---|
7578 | From F<trnl.U>:
|
---|
7579 |
|
---|
7580 | This variable contains the value to be passed to the tr(1)
|
---|
7581 | command to transliterate a newline. Typical values are
|
---|
7582 | C<\012> and C<\n>. This is needed for C<EBCDIC> systems where
|
---|
7583 | newline is not necessarily C<\012>.
|
---|
7584 |
|
---|
7585 | =item C<troff>
|
---|
7586 |
|
---|
7587 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7588 |
|
---|
7589 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7590 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7591 |
|
---|
7592 | =item C<ttyname_r_proto>
|
---|
7593 |
|
---|
7594 | From F<d_ttyname_r.U>:
|
---|
7595 |
|
---|
7596 | This variable encodes the prototype of ttyname_r.
|
---|
7597 | It is zero if d_ttyname_r is undef, and one of the
|
---|
7598 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ttyname_r
|
---|
7599 | is defined.
|
---|
7600 |
|
---|
7601 | =back
|
---|
7602 |
|
---|
7603 | =head2 u
|
---|
7604 |
|
---|
7605 | =over 4
|
---|
7606 |
|
---|
7607 | =item C<u16size>
|
---|
7608 |
|
---|
7609 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7610 |
|
---|
7611 | This variable is the size of an U16 in bytes.
|
---|
7612 |
|
---|
7613 | =item C<u16type>
|
---|
7614 |
|
---|
7615 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7616 |
|
---|
7617 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U16.
|
---|
7618 |
|
---|
7619 | =item C<u32size>
|
---|
7620 |
|
---|
7621 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7622 |
|
---|
7623 | This variable is the size of an U32 in bytes.
|
---|
7624 |
|
---|
7625 | =item C<u32type>
|
---|
7626 |
|
---|
7627 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7628 |
|
---|
7629 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U32.
|
---|
7630 |
|
---|
7631 | =item C<u64size>
|
---|
7632 |
|
---|
7633 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7634 |
|
---|
7635 | This variable is the size of an U64 in bytes.
|
---|
7636 |
|
---|
7637 | =item C<u64type>
|
---|
7638 |
|
---|
7639 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7640 |
|
---|
7641 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U64.
|
---|
7642 |
|
---|
7643 | =item C<u8size>
|
---|
7644 |
|
---|
7645 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7646 |
|
---|
7647 | This variable is the size of an U8 in bytes.
|
---|
7648 |
|
---|
7649 | =item C<u8type>
|
---|
7650 |
|
---|
7651 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7652 |
|
---|
7653 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U8.
|
---|
7654 |
|
---|
7655 | =item C<uidformat>
|
---|
7656 |
|
---|
7657 | From F<uidf.U>:
|
---|
7658 |
|
---|
7659 | This variable contains the format string used for printing a Uid_t.
|
---|
7660 |
|
---|
7661 | =item C<uidsign>
|
---|
7662 |
|
---|
7663 | From F<uidsign.U>:
|
---|
7664 |
|
---|
7665 | This variable contains the signedness of a uidtype.
|
---|
7666 | 1 for unsigned, -1 for signed.
|
---|
7667 |
|
---|
7668 | =item C<uidsize>
|
---|
7669 |
|
---|
7670 | From F<uidsize.U>:
|
---|
7671 |
|
---|
7672 | This variable contains the size of a uidtype in bytes.
|
---|
7673 |
|
---|
7674 | =item C<uidtype>
|
---|
7675 |
|
---|
7676 | From F<uidtype.U>:
|
---|
7677 |
|
---|
7678 | This variable defines Uid_t to be something like uid_t, int,
|
---|
7679 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare user ids in the kernel.
|
---|
7680 |
|
---|
7681 | =item C<uname>
|
---|
7682 |
|
---|
7683 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7684 |
|
---|
7685 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
7686 | full pathname (if any) of the uname program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
7687 | the value is reset to a plain C<uname> and is not useful.
|
---|
7688 |
|
---|
7689 | =item C<uniq>
|
---|
7690 |
|
---|
7691 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7692 |
|
---|
7693 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
7694 | full pathname (if any) of the uniq program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
7695 | the value is reset to a plain C<uniq> and is not useful.
|
---|
7696 |
|
---|
7697 | =item C<uquadtype>
|
---|
7698 |
|
---|
7699 | From F<quadtype.U>:
|
---|
7700 |
|
---|
7701 | This variable defines Uquad_t to be something like unsigned long,
|
---|
7702 | unsigned int, unsigned long long, uint64_t, or whatever type is
|
---|
7703 | used for 64-bit integers.
|
---|
7704 |
|
---|
7705 | =item C<use5005threads>
|
---|
7706 |
|
---|
7707 | From F<usethreads.U>:
|
---|
7708 |
|
---|
7709 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_5005THREADS symbol,
|
---|
7710 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the 5.005-based
|
---|
7711 | threading implementation.
|
---|
7712 |
|
---|
7713 | =item C<use64bitall>
|
---|
7714 |
|
---|
7715 | From F<use64bits.U>:
|
---|
7716 |
|
---|
7717 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_64_BIT_ALL symbol,
|
---|
7718 | and indicates that 64-bit integer types should be used
|
---|
7719 | when available. The maximal possible
|
---|
7720 | 64-bitness is employed: LP64 or ILP64, meaning that you will
|
---|
7721 | be able to use more than 2 gigabytes of memory. This mode is
|
---|
7722 | even more binary incompatible than USE_64_BIT_INT. You may not
|
---|
7723 | be able to run the resulting executable in a 32-bit C<CPU> at all or
|
---|
7724 | you may need at least to reboot your C<OS> to 64-bit mode.
|
---|
7725 |
|
---|
7726 | =item C<use64bitint>
|
---|
7727 |
|
---|
7728 | From F<use64bits.U>:
|
---|
7729 |
|
---|
7730 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_64_BIT_INT symbol,
|
---|
7731 | and indicates that 64-bit integer types should be used
|
---|
7732 | when available. The minimal possible 64-bitness
|
---|
7733 | is employed, just enough to get 64-bit integers into Perl.
|
---|
7734 | This may mean using for example "long longs", while your memory
|
---|
7735 | may still be limited to 2 gigabytes.
|
---|
7736 |
|
---|
7737 | =item C<usecrosscompile>
|
---|
7738 |
|
---|
7739 | From F<Cross.U>:
|
---|
7740 |
|
---|
7741 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_CROSS_COMPILE> symbol,
|
---|
7742 | and indicates that Perl has been cross-compiled.
|
---|
7743 |
|
---|
7744 | =item C<usedl>
|
---|
7745 |
|
---|
7746 | From F<dlsrc.U>:
|
---|
7747 |
|
---|
7748 | This variable indicates if the system supports dynamic
|
---|
7749 | loading of some sort. See also dlsrc and dlobj.
|
---|
7750 |
|
---|
7751 | =item C<usefaststdio>
|
---|
7752 |
|
---|
7753 | From F<usefaststdio.U>:
|
---|
7754 |
|
---|
7755 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_FAST_STDIO> symbol,
|
---|
7756 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use C<fast stdio>.
|
---|
7757 | Defaults to define in Perls 5.8 and earlier, to undef later.
|
---|
7758 |
|
---|
7759 | =item C<useithreads>
|
---|
7760 |
|
---|
7761 | From F<usethreads.U>:
|
---|
7762 |
|
---|
7763 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_ITHREADS> symbol,
|
---|
7764 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the interpreter-based
|
---|
7765 | threading implementation.
|
---|
7766 |
|
---|
7767 | =item C<uselargefiles>
|
---|
7768 |
|
---|
7769 | From F<uselfs.U>:
|
---|
7770 |
|
---|
7771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_LARGE_FILES> symbol,
|
---|
7772 | and indicates that large file interfaces should be used when
|
---|
7773 | available.
|
---|
7774 |
|
---|
7775 | =item C<uselongdouble>
|
---|
7776 |
|
---|
7777 | From F<uselongdbl.U>:
|
---|
7778 |
|
---|
7779 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_LONG_DOUBLE> symbol,
|
---|
7780 | and indicates that long doubles should be used when available.
|
---|
7781 |
|
---|
7782 | =item C<usemallocwrap>
|
---|
7783 |
|
---|
7784 | From F<mallocsrc.U>:
|
---|
7785 |
|
---|
7786 | This variable contains y if we are wrapping malloc to prevent
|
---|
7787 | integer overflow during size calculations.
|
---|
7788 |
|
---|
7789 | =item C<usemorebits>
|
---|
7790 |
|
---|
7791 | From F<usemorebits.U>:
|
---|
7792 |
|
---|
7793 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_MORE_BITS> symbol,
|
---|
7794 | and indicates that explicit 64-bit interfaces and long doubles
|
---|
7795 | should be used when available.
|
---|
7796 |
|
---|
7797 | =item C<usemultiplicity>
|
---|
7798 |
|
---|
7799 | From F<usemultiplicity.U>:
|
---|
7800 |
|
---|
7801 | This variable conditionally defines the C<MULTIPLICITY> symbol,
|
---|
7802 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use multiplicity.
|
---|
7803 |
|
---|
7804 | =item C<usemymalloc>
|
---|
7805 |
|
---|
7806 | From F<mallocsrc.U>:
|
---|
7807 |
|
---|
7808 | This variable contains y if the malloc that comes with this package
|
---|
7809 | is desired over the system's version of malloc. People often include
|
---|
7810 | special versions of malloc for effiency, but such versions are often
|
---|
7811 | less portable. See also mallocsrc and mallocobj.
|
---|
7812 | If this is C<y>, then -lmalloc is removed from $libs.
|
---|
7813 |
|
---|
7814 | =item C<usenm>
|
---|
7815 |
|
---|
7816 | From F<usenm.U>:
|
---|
7817 |
|
---|
7818 | This variable contains C<true> or C<false> depending whether the
|
---|
7819 | nm extraction is wanted or not.
|
---|
7820 |
|
---|
7821 | =item C<useopcode>
|
---|
7822 |
|
---|
7823 | From F<Extensions.U>:
|
---|
7824 |
|
---|
7825 | This variable holds either C<true> or C<false> to indicate
|
---|
7826 | whether the Opcode extension should be used. The sole
|
---|
7827 | use for this currently is to allow an easy mechanism
|
---|
7828 | for users to skip the Opcode extension from the Configure
|
---|
7829 | command line.
|
---|
7830 |
|
---|
7831 | =item C<useperlio>
|
---|
7832 |
|
---|
7833 | From F<useperlio.U>:
|
---|
7834 |
|
---|
7835 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_PERLIO> symbol,
|
---|
7836 | and indicates that the PerlIO abstraction should be
|
---|
7837 | used throughout.
|
---|
7838 |
|
---|
7839 | =item C<useposix>
|
---|
7840 |
|
---|
7841 | From F<Extensions.U>:
|
---|
7842 |
|
---|
7843 | This variable holds either C<true> or C<false> to indicate
|
---|
7844 | whether the C<POSIX> extension should be used. The sole
|
---|
7845 | use for this currently is to allow an easy mechanism
|
---|
7846 | for hints files to indicate that C<POSIX> will not compile
|
---|
7847 | on a particular system.
|
---|
7848 |
|
---|
7849 | =item C<usereentrant>
|
---|
7850 |
|
---|
7851 | From F<usethreads.U>:
|
---|
7852 |
|
---|
7853 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_REENTRANT_API> symbol,
|
---|
7854 | which indicates that the thread code may try to use the various
|
---|
7855 | _r versions of library functions. This is only potentially
|
---|
7856 | meaningful if usethreads is set and is very experimental, it is
|
---|
7857 | not even prompted for.
|
---|
7858 |
|
---|
7859 | =item C<usesfio>
|
---|
7860 |
|
---|
7861 | From F<d_sfio.U>:
|
---|
7862 |
|
---|
7863 | This variable is set to true when the user agrees to use sfio.
|
---|
7864 | It is set to false when sfio is not available or when the user
|
---|
7865 | explicitely requests not to use sfio. It is here primarily so
|
---|
7866 | that command-line settings can override the auto-detection of
|
---|
7867 | d_sfio without running into a "WHOA THERE".
|
---|
7868 |
|
---|
7869 | =item C<useshrplib>
|
---|
7870 |
|
---|
7871 | From F<libperl.U>:
|
---|
7872 |
|
---|
7873 | This variable is set to C<true> if the user wishes
|
---|
7874 | to build a shared libperl, and C<false> otherwise.
|
---|
7875 |
|
---|
7876 | =item C<usesocks>
|
---|
7877 |
|
---|
7878 | From F<usesocks.U>:
|
---|
7879 |
|
---|
7880 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_SOCKS> symbol,
|
---|
7881 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use C<SOCKS>.
|
---|
7882 |
|
---|
7883 | =item C<usethreads>
|
---|
7884 |
|
---|
7885 | From F<usethreads.U>:
|
---|
7886 |
|
---|
7887 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_THREADS> symbol,
|
---|
7888 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use threads.
|
---|
7889 |
|
---|
7890 | =item C<usevendorprefix>
|
---|
7891 |
|
---|
7892 | From F<vendorprefix.U>:
|
---|
7893 |
|
---|
7894 | This variable tells whether the vendorprefix
|
---|
7895 | and consequently other vendor* paths are in use.
|
---|
7896 |
|
---|
7897 | =item C<usevfork>
|
---|
7898 |
|
---|
7899 | From F<d_vfork.U>:
|
---|
7900 |
|
---|
7901 | This variable is set to true when the user accepts to use vfork.
|
---|
7902 | It is set to false when no vfork is available or when the user
|
---|
7903 | explicitely requests not to use vfork.
|
---|
7904 |
|
---|
7905 | =item C<usrinc>
|
---|
7906 |
|
---|
7907 | From F<usrinc.U>:
|
---|
7908 |
|
---|
7909 | This variable holds the path of the include files, which is
|
---|
7910 | usually F</usr/include>. It is mainly used by other Configure units.
|
---|
7911 |
|
---|
7912 | =item C<uuname>
|
---|
7913 |
|
---|
7914 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
7915 |
|
---|
7916 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
7917 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
7918 |
|
---|
7919 | =item C<uvoformat>
|
---|
7920 |
|
---|
7921 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
7922 |
|
---|
7923 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
7924 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned octal integer.
|
---|
7925 |
|
---|
7926 | =item C<uvsize>
|
---|
7927 |
|
---|
7928 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7929 |
|
---|
7930 | This variable is the size of a C<UV> in bytes.
|
---|
7931 |
|
---|
7932 | =item C<uvtype>
|
---|
7933 |
|
---|
7934 | From F<perlxv.U>:
|
---|
7935 |
|
---|
7936 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<UV>.
|
---|
7937 |
|
---|
7938 | =item C<uvuformat>
|
---|
7939 |
|
---|
7940 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
7941 |
|
---|
7942 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
7943 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned decimal integer.
|
---|
7944 |
|
---|
7945 | =item C<uvxformat>
|
---|
7946 |
|
---|
7947 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
7948 |
|
---|
7949 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
7950 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned hexadecimal integer in lowercase abcdef.
|
---|
7951 |
|
---|
7952 | =item C<uvXUformat>
|
---|
7953 |
|
---|
7954 | From F<perlxvf.U>:
|
---|
7955 |
|
---|
7956 | This variable contains the format string used for printing
|
---|
7957 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned hexadecimal integer in uppercase C<ABCDEF>.
|
---|
7958 |
|
---|
7959 | =back
|
---|
7960 |
|
---|
7961 | =head2 v
|
---|
7962 |
|
---|
7963 | =over 4
|
---|
7964 |
|
---|
7965 | =item C<vendorarch>
|
---|
7966 |
|
---|
7967 | From F<vendorarch.U>:
|
---|
7968 |
|
---|
7969 | This variable contains the value of the C<PERL_VENDORARCH> symbol.
|
---|
7970 | It may have a F<~> on the front.
|
---|
7971 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
7972 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own
|
---|
7973 | architecture-dependent modules and extensions in this directory with
|
---|
7974 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor
|
---|
7975 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
7976 |
|
---|
7977 | =item C<vendorarchexp>
|
---|
7978 |
|
---|
7979 | From F<vendorarch.U>:
|
---|
7980 |
|
---|
7981 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorarch, so that you
|
---|
7982 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
7983 |
|
---|
7984 | =item C<vendorbin>
|
---|
7985 |
|
---|
7986 | From F<vendorbin.U>:
|
---|
7987 |
|
---|
7988 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORBIN> symbol.
|
---|
7989 | It may have a F<~> on the front.
|
---|
7990 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
7991 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place additional
|
---|
7992 | binaries in this directory with
|
---|
7993 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor
|
---|
7994 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
7995 |
|
---|
7996 | =item C<vendorbinexp>
|
---|
7997 |
|
---|
7998 | From F<vendorbin.U>:
|
---|
7999 |
|
---|
8000 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorbin, so that you
|
---|
8001 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
8002 |
|
---|
8003 | =item C<vendorhtml1dir>
|
---|
8004 |
|
---|
8005 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>:
|
---|
8006 |
|
---|
8007 | This variable contains the name of the directory for html
|
---|
8008 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front.
|
---|
8009 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
8010 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own
|
---|
8011 | html pages in this directory with
|
---|
8012 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor
|
---|
8013 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
8014 |
|
---|
8015 | =item C<vendorhtml1direxp>
|
---|
8016 |
|
---|
8017 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>:
|
---|
8018 |
|
---|
8019 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorhtml1dir, so that you
|
---|
8020 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
8021 |
|
---|
8022 | =item C<vendorhtml3dir>
|
---|
8023 |
|
---|
8024 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>:
|
---|
8025 |
|
---|
8026 | This variable contains the name of the directory for html
|
---|
8027 | library pages. It may have a F<~> on the front.
|
---|
8028 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
8029 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own
|
---|
8030 | html pages for modules and extensions in this directory with
|
---|
8031 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor
|
---|
8032 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
8033 |
|
---|
8034 | =item C<vendorhtml3direxp>
|
---|
8035 |
|
---|
8036 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>:
|
---|
8037 |
|
---|
8038 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorhtml3dir, so that you
|
---|
8039 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
8040 |
|
---|
8041 | =item C<vendorlib>
|
---|
8042 |
|
---|
8043 | From F<vendorlib.U>:
|
---|
8044 |
|
---|
8045 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORLIB> symbol,
|
---|
8046 | which is the name of the private library for this package.
|
---|
8047 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
8048 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own
|
---|
8049 | modules in this directory with
|
---|
8050 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor
|
---|
8051 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
8052 |
|
---|
8053 | =item C<vendorlib_stem>
|
---|
8054 |
|
---|
8055 | From F<vendorlib.U>:
|
---|
8056 |
|
---|
8057 | This variable is $vendorlibexp with any trailing version-specific component
|
---|
8058 | removed. The elements in inc_version_list (F<inc_version_list.U>) can
|
---|
8059 | be tacked onto this variable to generate a list of directories to search.
|
---|
8060 |
|
---|
8061 | =item C<vendorlibexp>
|
---|
8062 |
|
---|
8063 | From F<vendorlib.U>:
|
---|
8064 |
|
---|
8065 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorlib, so that you
|
---|
8066 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
8067 |
|
---|
8068 | =item C<vendorman1dir>
|
---|
8069 |
|
---|
8070 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>:
|
---|
8071 |
|
---|
8072 | This variable contains the name of the directory for man1
|
---|
8073 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front.
|
---|
8074 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
8075 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own
|
---|
8076 | man1 pages in this directory with
|
---|
8077 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor
|
---|
8078 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
8079 |
|
---|
8080 | =item C<vendorman1direxp>
|
---|
8081 |
|
---|
8082 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>:
|
---|
8083 |
|
---|
8084 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorman1dir, so that you
|
---|
8085 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
8086 |
|
---|
8087 | =item C<vendorman3dir>
|
---|
8088 |
|
---|
8089 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>:
|
---|
8090 |
|
---|
8091 | This variable contains the name of the directory for man3
|
---|
8092 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front.
|
---|
8093 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
8094 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own
|
---|
8095 | man3 pages in this directory with
|
---|
8096 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor
|
---|
8097 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
8098 |
|
---|
8099 | =item C<vendorman3direxp>
|
---|
8100 |
|
---|
8101 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>:
|
---|
8102 |
|
---|
8103 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorman3dir, so that you
|
---|
8104 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
8105 |
|
---|
8106 | =item C<vendorprefix>
|
---|
8107 |
|
---|
8108 | From F<vendorprefix.U>:
|
---|
8109 |
|
---|
8110 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below
|
---|
8111 | which the vendor will install add-on packages.
|
---|
8112 | See C<INSTALL> for usage and examples.
|
---|
8113 |
|
---|
8114 | =item C<vendorprefixexp>
|
---|
8115 |
|
---|
8116 | From F<vendorprefix.U>:
|
---|
8117 |
|
---|
8118 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below
|
---|
8119 | which the vendor will install add-on packages. Derived from vendorprefix.
|
---|
8120 |
|
---|
8121 | =item C<vendorscript>
|
---|
8122 |
|
---|
8123 | From F<vendorscript.U>:
|
---|
8124 |
|
---|
8125 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORSCRIPT> symbol.
|
---|
8126 | It may have a F<~> on the front.
|
---|
8127 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory.
|
---|
8128 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place additional
|
---|
8129 | executable scripts in this directory with
|
---|
8130 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor
|
---|
8131 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details.
|
---|
8132 |
|
---|
8133 | =item C<vendorscriptexp>
|
---|
8134 |
|
---|
8135 | From F<vendorscript.U>:
|
---|
8136 |
|
---|
8137 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorscript, so that you
|
---|
8138 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts.
|
---|
8139 |
|
---|
8140 | =item C<version>
|
---|
8141 |
|
---|
8142 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
8143 |
|
---|
8144 | The full version number of this package, such as 5.6.1 (or 5_6_1).
|
---|
8145 | This combines revision, patchlevel, and subversion to get the
|
---|
8146 | full version number, including any possible subversions.
|
---|
8147 | This is suitable for use as a directory name, and hence is
|
---|
8148 | filesystem dependent.
|
---|
8149 |
|
---|
8150 | =item C<version_patchlevel_string>
|
---|
8151 |
|
---|
8152 | From F<patchlevel.U>:
|
---|
8153 |
|
---|
8154 | This is a string combining version, subversion and
|
---|
8155 | perl_patchlevel (if perl_patchlevel is non-zero).
|
---|
8156 | It is typically something like
|
---|
8157 | 'version 7 subversion 1' or
|
---|
8158 | 'version 7 subversion 1 patchlevel 11224'
|
---|
8159 | It is computed here to avoid duplication of code in F<myconfig.SH>
|
---|
8160 | and F<lib/Config.pm>.
|
---|
8161 |
|
---|
8162 | =item C<versiononly>
|
---|
8163 |
|
---|
8164 | From F<versiononly.U>:
|
---|
8165 |
|
---|
8166 | If set, this symbol indicates that only the version-specific
|
---|
8167 | components of a perl installation should be installed.
|
---|
8168 | This may be useful for making a test installation of a new
|
---|
8169 | version without disturbing the existing installation.
|
---|
8170 | Setting versiononly is equivalent to setting installperl's -v option.
|
---|
8171 | In particular, the non-versioned scripts and programs such as
|
---|
8172 | a2p, c2ph, h2xs, pod2*, and perldoc are not installed
|
---|
8173 | (see C<INSTALL> for a more complete list). Nor are the man
|
---|
8174 | pages installed.
|
---|
8175 | Usually, this is undef.
|
---|
8176 |
|
---|
8177 | =item C<vi>
|
---|
8178 |
|
---|
8179 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
8180 |
|
---|
8181 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
8182 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
8183 |
|
---|
8184 | =item C<voidflags>
|
---|
8185 |
|
---|
8186 | From F<voidflags.U>:
|
---|
8187 |
|
---|
8188 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VOIDFLAGS> symbol,
|
---|
8189 | which indicates how much support of the void type is given by this
|
---|
8190 | compiler. See C<VOIDFLAGS> for more info.
|
---|
8191 |
|
---|
8192 | =back
|
---|
8193 |
|
---|
8194 | =head2 x
|
---|
8195 |
|
---|
8196 | =over 4
|
---|
8197 |
|
---|
8198 | =item C<xlibpth>
|
---|
8199 |
|
---|
8200 | From F<libpth.U>:
|
---|
8201 |
|
---|
8202 | This variable holds extra path (space-separated) used to find
|
---|
8203 | libraries on this platform, for example C<CPU>-specific libraries
|
---|
8204 | (on multi-C<CPU> platforms) may be listed here.
|
---|
8205 |
|
---|
8206 | =back
|
---|
8207 |
|
---|
8208 | =head2 y
|
---|
8209 |
|
---|
8210 | =over 4
|
---|
8211 |
|
---|
8212 | =item C<yacc>
|
---|
8213 |
|
---|
8214 | From F<yacc.U>:
|
---|
8215 |
|
---|
8216 | This variable holds the name of the compiler compiler we
|
---|
8217 | want to use in the Makefile. It can be yacc, byacc, or bison -y.
|
---|
8218 |
|
---|
8219 | =item C<yaccflags>
|
---|
8220 |
|
---|
8221 | From F<yacc.U>:
|
---|
8222 |
|
---|
8223 | This variable contains any additional yacc flags desired by the
|
---|
8224 | user. It is up to the Makefile to use this.
|
---|
8225 |
|
---|
8226 | =back
|
---|
8227 |
|
---|
8228 | =head2 z
|
---|
8229 |
|
---|
8230 | =over 4
|
---|
8231 |
|
---|
8232 | =item C<zcat>
|
---|
8233 |
|
---|
8234 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
8235 |
|
---|
8236 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure.
|
---|
8237 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful.
|
---|
8238 |
|
---|
8239 | =item C<zip>
|
---|
8240 |
|
---|
8241 | From F<Loc.U>:
|
---|
8242 |
|
---|
8243 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the
|
---|
8244 | full pathname (if any) of the zip program. After Configure runs,
|
---|
8245 | the value is reset to a plain C<zip> and is not useful.
|
---|
8246 |
|
---|
8247 |
|
---|
8248 | =back
|
---|
8249 |
|
---|
8250 | =head1 NOTE
|
---|
8251 |
|
---|
8252 | This module contains a good example of how to use tie to implement a
|
---|
8253 | cache and an example of how to make a tied variable readonly to those
|
---|
8254 | outside of it.
|
---|
8255 |
|
---|
8256 | =cut
|
---|
8257 |
|
---|